92fe8248aff3caa23c11c267cdbe6d3f968dfb1f
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / gas / doc / as.texinfo
1 \input texinfo @c -*-Texinfo-*-
2 @c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
3 @c 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012
4 @c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
5 @c UPDATE!! On future updates--
6 @c (1) check for new machine-dep cmdline options in
7 @c md_parse_option definitions in config/tc-*.c
8 @c (2) for platform-specific directives, examine md_pseudo_op
9 @c in config/tc-*.c
10 @c (3) for object-format specific directives, examine obj_pseudo_op
11 @c in config/obj-*.c
12 @c (4) portable directives in potable[] in read.c
13 @c %**start of header
14 @setfilename as.info
15 @c ---config---
16 @macro gcctabopt{body}
17 @code{\body\}
18 @end macro
19 @c defaults, config file may override:
20 @set have-stabs
21 @c ---
22 @c man begin NAME
23 @c ---
24 @include asconfig.texi
25 @include bfdver.texi
26 @c ---
27 @c man end
28 @c ---
29 @c common OR combinations of conditions
30 @ifset COFF
31 @set COFF-ELF
32 @end ifset
33 @ifset ELF
34 @set COFF-ELF
35 @end ifset
36 @ifset AOUT
37 @set aout-bout
38 @end ifset
39 @ifset ARM/Thumb
40 @set ARM
41 @end ifset
42 @ifset Blackfin
43 @set Blackfin
44 @end ifset
45 @ifset BOUT
46 @set aout-bout
47 @end ifset
48 @ifset H8/300
49 @set H8
50 @end ifset
51 @ifset SH
52 @set H8
53 @end ifset
54 @ifset HPPA
55 @set abnormal-separator
56 @end ifset
57 @c ------------
58 @ifset GENERIC
59 @settitle Using @value{AS}
60 @end ifset
61 @ifclear GENERIC
62 @settitle Using @value{AS} (@value{TARGET})
63 @end ifclear
64 @setchapternewpage odd
65 @c %**end of header
66
67 @c @smallbook
68 @c @set SMALL
69 @c WARE! Some of the machine-dependent sections contain tables of machine
70 @c instructions. Except in multi-column format, these tables look silly.
71 @c Unfortunately, Texinfo doesn't have a general-purpose multi-col format, so
72 @c the multi-col format is faked within @example sections.
73 @c
74 @c Again unfortunately, the natural size that fits on a page, for these tables,
75 @c is different depending on whether or not smallbook is turned on.
76 @c This matters, because of order: text flow switches columns at each page
77 @c break.
78 @c
79 @c The format faked in this source works reasonably well for smallbook,
80 @c not well for the default large-page format. This manual expects that if you
81 @c turn on @smallbook, you will also uncomment the "@set SMALL" to enable the
82 @c tables in question. You can turn on one without the other at your
83 @c discretion, of course.
84 @ifinfo
85 @set SMALL
86 @c the insn tables look just as silly in info files regardless of smallbook,
87 @c might as well show 'em anyways.
88 @end ifinfo
89
90 @ifnottex
91 @dircategory Software development
92 @direntry
93 * As: (as). The GNU assembler.
94 * Gas: (as). The GNU assembler.
95 @end direntry
96 @end ifnottex
97
98 @finalout
99 @syncodeindex ky cp
100
101 @copying
102 This file documents the GNU Assembler "@value{AS}".
103
104 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
105 Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999,
106 2000, 2001, 2002, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011 Free Software Foundation,
107 Inc.
108
109 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
110 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
111 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
112 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
113 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
114 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
115
116 @c man end
117 @end copying
118
119 @titlepage
120 @title Using @value{AS}
121 @subtitle The @sc{gnu} Assembler
122 @ifclear GENERIC
123 @subtitle for the @value{TARGET} family
124 @end ifclear
125 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
126 @sp 1
127 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
128 @end ifset
129 @sp 1
130 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
131 @sp 1
132 @sp 13
133 The Free Software Foundation Inc.@: thanks The Nice Computer
134 Company of Australia for loaning Dean Elsner to write the
135 first (Vax) version of @command{as} for Project @sc{gnu}.
136 The proprietors, management and staff of TNCCA thank FSF for
137 distracting the boss while they got some work
138 done.
139 @sp 3
140 @author Dean Elsner, Jay Fenlason & friends
141 @page
142 @tex
143 {\parskip=0pt
144 \hfill {\it Using {\tt @value{AS}}}\par
145 \hfill Edited by Cygnus Support\par
146 }
147 %"boxit" macro for figures:
148 %Modified from Knuth's ``boxit'' macro from TeXbook (answer to exercise 21.3)
149 \gdef\boxit#1#2{\vbox{\hrule\hbox{\vrule\kern3pt
150 \vbox{\parindent=0pt\parskip=0pt\hsize=#1\kern3pt\strut\hfil
151 #2\hfil\strut\kern3pt}\kern3pt\vrule}\hrule}}%box with visible outline
152 \gdef\ibox#1#2{\hbox to #1{#2\hfil}\kern8pt}% invisible box
153 @end tex
154
155 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
156 Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999,
157 2000, 2001, 2002, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011 Free Software Foundation,
158 Inc.
159
160 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
161 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
162 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
163 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
164 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
165 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
166
167 @end titlepage
168 @contents
169
170 @ifnottex
171 @node Top
172 @top Using @value{AS}
173
174 This file is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}
175 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
176 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
177 @end ifset
178 version @value{VERSION}.
179 @ifclear GENERIC
180 This version of the file describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
181 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
182 @end ifclear
183
184 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
185 Documentation License. A copy of the license is included in the
186 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
187
188 @menu
189 * Overview:: Overview
190 * Invoking:: Command-Line Options
191 * Syntax:: Syntax
192 * Sections:: Sections and Relocation
193 * Symbols:: Symbols
194 * Expressions:: Expressions
195 * Pseudo Ops:: Assembler Directives
196 @ifset ELF
197 * Object Attributes:: Object Attributes
198 @end ifset
199 * Machine Dependencies:: Machine Dependent Features
200 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
201 * Acknowledgements:: Who Did What
202 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
203 * AS Index:: AS Index
204 @end menu
205 @end ifnottex
206
207 @node Overview
208 @chapter Overview
209 @iftex
210 This manual is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}.
211 @ifclear GENERIC
212 This version of the manual describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
213 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
214 @end ifclear
215 @end iftex
216
217 @cindex invocation summary
218 @cindex option summary
219 @cindex summary of options
220 Here is a brief summary of how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}. For details,
221 see @ref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}.
222
223 @c man title AS the portable GNU assembler.
224
225 @ignore
226 @c man begin SEEALSO
227 gcc(1), ld(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils} and @file{ld}.
228 @c man end
229 @end ignore
230
231 @c We don't use deffn and friends for the following because they seem
232 @c to be limited to one line for the header.
233 @smallexample
234 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
235 @value{AS} [@b{-a}[@b{cdghlns}][=@var{file}]] [@b{--alternate}] [@b{-D}]
236 [@b{--compress-debug-sections}] [@b{--nocompress-debug-sections}]
237 [@b{--debug-prefix-map} @var{old}=@var{new}]
238 [@b{--defsym} @var{sym}=@var{val}] [@b{-f}] [@b{-g}] [@b{--gstabs}]
239 [@b{--gstabs+}] [@b{--gdwarf-2}] [@b{--help}] [@b{-I} @var{dir}] [@b{-J}]
240 [@b{-K}] [@b{-L}] [@b{--listing-lhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
241 [@b{--listing-lhs-width2}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--listing-rhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
242 [@b{--listing-cont-lines}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--keep-locals}] [@b{-o}
243 @var{objfile}] [@b{-R}] [@b{--reduce-memory-overheads}] [@b{--statistics}]
244 [@b{-v}] [@b{-version}] [@b{--version}] [@b{-W}] [@b{--warn}]
245 [@b{--fatal-warnings}] [@b{-w}] [@b{-x}] [@b{-Z}] [@b{@@@var{FILE}}]
246 [@b{--size-check=[error|warning]}]
247 [@b{--target-help}] [@var{target-options}]
248 [@b{--}|@var{files} @dots{}]
249 @c
250 @c Target dependent options are listed below. Keep the list sorted.
251 @c Add an empty line for separation.
252 @ifset AARCH64
253
254 @emph{Target AArch64 options:}
255 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
256 @end ifset
257 @ifset ALPHA
258
259 @emph{Target Alpha options:}
260 [@b{-m@var{cpu}}]
261 [@b{-mdebug} | @b{-no-mdebug}]
262 [@b{-replace} | @b{-noreplace}]
263 [@b{-relax}] [@b{-g}] [@b{-G@var{size}}]
264 [@b{-F}] [@b{-32addr}]
265 @end ifset
266 @ifset ARC
267
268 @emph{Target ARC options:}
269 [@b{-marc[5|6|7|8]}]
270 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
271 @end ifset
272 @ifset ARM
273
274 @emph{Target ARM options:}
275 @c Don't document the deprecated options
276 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
277 [@b{-march}=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
278 [@b{-mfpu}=@var{floating-point-format}]
279 [@b{-mfloat-abi}=@var{abi}]
280 [@b{-meabi}=@var{ver}]
281 [@b{-mthumb}]
282 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
283 [@b{-mapcs-32}|@b{-mapcs-26}|@b{-mapcs-float}|
284 @b{-mapcs-reentrant}]
285 [@b{-mthumb-interwork}] [@b{-k}]
286 @end ifset
287 @ifset Blackfin
288
289 @emph{Target Blackfin options:}
290 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[-@var{sirevision}]]
291 [@b{-mfdpic}]
292 [@b{-mno-fdpic}]
293 [@b{-mnopic}]
294 @end ifset
295 @ifset CRIS
296
297 @emph{Target CRIS options:}
298 [@b{--underscore} | @b{--no-underscore}]
299 [@b{--pic}] [@b{-N}]
300 [@b{--emulation=criself} | @b{--emulation=crisaout}]
301 [@b{--march=v0_v10} | @b{--march=v10} | @b{--march=v32} | @b{--march=common_v10_v32}]
302 @c Deprecated -- deliberately not documented.
303 @c [@b{-h}] [@b{-H}]
304 @end ifset
305 @ifset D10V
306
307 @emph{Target D10V options:}
308 [@b{-O}]
309 @end ifset
310 @ifset D30V
311
312 @emph{Target D30V options:}
313 [@b{-O}|@b{-n}|@b{-N}]
314 @end ifset
315 @ifset EPIPHANY
316
317 @emph{Target EPIPHANY options:}
318 [@b{-mepiphany}|@b{-mepiphany16}]
319 @end ifset
320 @ifset H8
321
322 @emph{Target H8/300 options:}
323 [-h-tick-hex]
324 @end ifset
325 @ifset HPPA
326 @c HPPA has no machine-dependent assembler options (yet).
327 @end ifset
328 @ifset I80386
329
330 @emph{Target i386 options:}
331 [@b{--32}|@b{--x32}|@b{--64}] [@b{-n}]
332 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}[+@var{EXTENSION}@dots{}]] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}]
333 @end ifset
334 @ifset I960
335
336 @emph{Target i960 options:}
337 @c see md_parse_option in tc-i960.c
338 [@b{-ACA}|@b{-ACA_A}|@b{-ACB}|@b{-ACC}|@b{-AKA}|@b{-AKB}|
339 @b{-AKC}|@b{-AMC}]
340 [@b{-b}] [@b{-no-relax}]
341 @end ifset
342 @ifset IA64
343
344 @emph{Target IA-64 options:}
345 [@b{-mconstant-gp}|@b{-mauto-pic}]
346 [@b{-milp32}|@b{-milp64}|@b{-mlp64}|@b{-mp64}]
347 [@b{-mle}|@b{mbe}]
348 [@b{-mtune=itanium1}|@b{-mtune=itanium2}]
349 [@b{-munwind-check=warning}|@b{-munwind-check=error}]
350 [@b{-mhint.b=ok}|@b{-mhint.b=warning}|@b{-mhint.b=error}]
351 [@b{-x}|@b{-xexplicit}] [@b{-xauto}] [@b{-xdebug}]
352 @end ifset
353 @ifset IP2K
354
355 @emph{Target IP2K options:}
356 [@b{-mip2022}|@b{-mip2022ext}]
357 @end ifset
358 @ifset M32C
359
360 @emph{Target M32C options:}
361 [@b{-m32c}|@b{-m16c}] [-relax] [-h-tick-hex]
362 @end ifset
363 @ifset M32R
364
365 @emph{Target M32R options:}
366 [@b{--m32rx}|@b{--[no-]warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts}|
367 @b{--W[n]p}]
368 @end ifset
369 @ifset M680X0
370
371 @emph{Target M680X0 options:}
372 [@b{-l}] [@b{-m68000}|@b{-m68010}|@b{-m68020}|@dots{}]
373 @end ifset
374 @ifset M68HC11
375
376 @emph{Target M68HC11 options:}
377 [@b{-m68hc11}|@b{-m68hc12}|@b{-m68hcs12}|@b{-mm9s12x}|@b{-mm9s12xg}]
378 [@b{-mshort}|@b{-mlong}]
379 [@b{-mshort-double}|@b{-mlong-double}]
380 [@b{--force-long-branches}] [@b{--short-branches}]
381 [@b{--strict-direct-mode}] [@b{--print-insn-syntax}]
382 [@b{--print-opcodes}] [@b{--generate-example}]
383 @end ifset
384 @ifset MCORE
385
386 @emph{Target MCORE options:}
387 [@b{-jsri2bsr}] [@b{-sifilter}] [@b{-relax}]
388 [@b{-mcpu=[210|340]}]
389 @end ifset
390 @ifset MICROBLAZE
391 @emph{Target MICROBLAZE options:}
392 @c MicroBlaze has no machine-dependent assembler options.
393 @end ifset
394 @ifset MIPS
395
396 @emph{Target MIPS options:}
397 [@b{-nocpp}] [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}[@var{optimization level}]]
398 [@b{-g}[@var{debug level}]] [@b{-G} @var{num}] [@b{-KPIC}] [@b{-call_shared}]
399 [@b{-non_shared}] [@b{-xgot} [@b{-mvxworks-pic}]
400 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}] [@b{-32}] [@b{-n32}] [@b{-64}] [@b{-mfp32}] [@b{-mgp32}]
401 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mips1}] [@b{-mips2}]
402 [@b{-mips3}] [@b{-mips4}] [@b{-mips5}] [@b{-mips32}] [@b{-mips32r2}]
403 [@b{-mips64}] [@b{-mips64r2}]
404 [@b{-construct-floats}] [@b{-no-construct-floats}]
405 [@b{-trap}] [@b{-no-break}] [@b{-break}] [@b{-no-trap}]
406 [@b{-mips16}] [@b{-no-mips16}]
407 [@b{-mmicromips}] [@b{-mno-micromips}]
408 [@b{-msmartmips}] [@b{-mno-smartmips}]
409 [@b{-mips3d}] [@b{-no-mips3d}]
410 [@b{-mdmx}] [@b{-no-mdmx}]
411 [@b{-mdsp}] [@b{-mno-dsp}]
412 [@b{-mdspr2}] [@b{-mno-dspr2}]
413 [@b{-mmt}] [@b{-mno-mt}]
414 [@b{-mmcu}] [@b{-mno-mcu}]
415 [@b{-mfix7000}] [@b{-mno-fix7000}]
416 [@b{-mfix-vr4120}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4120}]
417 [@b{-mfix-vr4130}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4130}]
418 [@b{-mdebug}] [@b{-no-mdebug}]
419 [@b{-mpdr}] [@b{-mno-pdr}]
420 @end ifset
421 @ifset MMIX
422
423 @emph{Target MMIX options:}
424 [@b{--fixed-special-register-names}] [@b{--globalize-symbols}]
425 [@b{--gnu-syntax}] [@b{--relax}] [@b{--no-predefined-symbols}]
426 [@b{--no-expand}] [@b{--no-merge-gregs}] [@b{-x}]
427 [@b{--linker-allocated-gregs}]
428 @end ifset
429 @ifset PDP11
430
431 @emph{Target PDP11 options:}
432 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}] [@b{-mall}] [@b{-mno-extensions}]
433 [@b{-m}@var{extension}|@b{-mno-}@var{extension}]
434 [@b{-m}@var{cpu}] [@b{-m}@var{machine}]
435 @end ifset
436 @ifset PJ
437
438 @emph{Target picoJava options:}
439 [@b{-mb}|@b{-me}]
440 @end ifset
441 @ifset PPC
442
443 @emph{Target PowerPC options:}
444 [@b{-a32}|@b{-a64}]
445 [@b{-mpwrx}|@b{-mpwr2}|@b{-mpwr}|@b{-m601}|@b{-mppc}|@b{-mppc32}|@b{-m603}|@b{-m604}|@b{-m403}|@b{-m405}|
446 @b{-m440}|@b{-m464}|@b{-m476}|@b{-m7400}|@b{-m7410}|@b{-m7450}|@b{-m7455}|@b{-m750cl}|@b{-mppc64}|
447 @b{-m620}|@b{-me500}|@b{-e500x2}|@b{-me500mc}|@b{-me500mc64}|@b{-me5500}|@b{-me6500}|@b{-mppc64bridge}|
448 @b{-mbooke}|@b{-mpower4}|@b{-mpr4}|@b{-mpower5}|@b{-mpwr5}|@b{-mpwr5x}|@b{-mpower6}|@b{-mpwr6}|
449 @b{-mpower7}|@b{-mpw7}|@b{-ma2}|@b{-mcell}|@b{-mspe}|@b{-mtitan}|@b{-me300}|@b{-mvle}|@b{-mcom}]
450 [@b{-many}] [@b{-maltivec}|@b{-mvsx}]
451 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
452 [@b{-mrelocatable}|@b{-mrelocatable-lib}|@b{-K PIC}] [@b{-memb}]
453 [@b{-mlittle}|@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-le}|@b{-mbig}|@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-be}]
454 [@b{-msolaris}|@b{-mno-solaris}]
455 [@b{-nops=@var{count}}]
456 @end ifset
457 @ifset RX
458
459 @emph{Target RX options:}
460 [@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-mbig-endian}]
461 [@b{-m32bit-ints}|@b{-m16bit-ints}]
462 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
463 @end ifset
464 @ifset S390
465
466 @emph{Target s390 options:}
467 [@b{-m31}|@b{-m64}] [@b{-mesa}|@b{-mzarch}] [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}]
468 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
469 [@b{-mwarn-areg-zero}]
470 @end ifset
471 @ifset SCORE
472
473 @emph{Target SCORE options:}
474 [@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}][@b{-FIXDD}][@b{-NWARN}]
475 [@b{-SCORE5}][@b{-SCORE5U}][@b{-SCORE7}][@b{-SCORE3}]
476 [@b{-march=score7}][@b{-march=score3}]
477 [@b{-USE_R1}][@b{-KPIC}][@b{-O0}][@b{-G} @var{num}][@b{-V}]
478 @end ifset
479 @ifset SPARC
480
481 @emph{Target SPARC options:}
482 @c The order here is important. See c-sparc.texi.
483 [@b{-Av6}|@b{-Av7}|@b{-Av8}|@b{-Asparclet}|@b{-Asparclite}
484 @b{-Av8plus}|@b{-Av8plusa}|@b{-Av9}|@b{-Av9a}]
485 [@b{-xarch=v8plus}|@b{-xarch=v8plusa}] [@b{-bump}]
486 [@b{-32}|@b{-64}]
487 @end ifset
488 @ifset TIC54X
489
490 @emph{Target TIC54X options:}
491 [@b{-mcpu=54[123589]}|@b{-mcpu=54[56]lp}] [@b{-mfar-mode}|@b{-mf}]
492 [@b{-merrors-to-file} @var{<filename>}|@b{-me} @var{<filename>}]
493 @end ifset
494
495 @ifset TIC6X
496
497 @emph{Target TIC6X options:}
498 [@b{-march=@var{arch}}] [@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-mlittle-endian}]
499 [@b{-mdsbt}|@b{-mno-dsbt}] [@b{-mpid=no}|@b{-mpid=near}|@b{-mpid=far}]
500 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}]
501 @end ifset
502 @ifset TILEGX
503
504 @emph{Target TILE-Gx options:}
505 [@b{-m32}|@b{-m64}][@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}]
506 @end ifset
507 @ifset TILEPRO
508 @c TILEPro has no machine-dependent assembler options
509 @end ifset
510
511 @ifset XTENSA
512
513 @emph{Target Xtensa options:}
514 [@b{--[no-]text-section-literals}] [@b{--[no-]absolute-literals}]
515 [@b{--[no-]target-align}] [@b{--[no-]longcalls}]
516 [@b{--[no-]transform}]
517 [@b{--rename-section} @var{oldname}=@var{newname}]
518 @end ifset
519
520 @ifset Z80
521
522 @emph{Target Z80 options:}
523 [@b{-z80}] [@b{-r800}]
524 [@b{ -ignore-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wnud}]
525 [@b{ -ignore-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wnup}]
526 [@b{ -warn-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wud}]
527 [@b{ -warn-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wup}]
528 [@b{ -forbid-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Fud}]
529 [@b{ -forbid-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Fup}]
530 @end ifset
531
532 @ifset Z8000
533 @c Z8000 has no machine-dependent assembler options
534 @end ifset
535
536 @c man end
537 @end smallexample
538
539 @c man begin OPTIONS
540
541 @table @gcctabopt
542 @include at-file.texi
543
544 @item -a[cdghlmns]
545 Turn on listings, in any of a variety of ways:
546
547 @table @gcctabopt
548 @item -ac
549 omit false conditionals
550
551 @item -ad
552 omit debugging directives
553
554 @item -ag
555 include general information, like @value{AS} version and options passed
556
557 @item -ah
558 include high-level source
559
560 @item -al
561 include assembly
562
563 @item -am
564 include macro expansions
565
566 @item -an
567 omit forms processing
568
569 @item -as
570 include symbols
571
572 @item =file
573 set the name of the listing file
574 @end table
575
576 You may combine these options; for example, use @samp{-aln} for assembly
577 listing without forms processing. The @samp{=file} option, if used, must be
578 the last one. By itself, @samp{-a} defaults to @samp{-ahls}.
579
580 @item --alternate
581 Begin in alternate macro mode.
582 @ifclear man
583 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
584 @end ifclear
585
586 @item --compress-debug-sections
587 Compress DWARF debug sections using zlib. The debug sections are renamed
588 to begin with @samp{.zdebug}, and the resulting object file may not be
589 compatible with older linkers and object file utilities.
590
591 @item --nocompress-debug-sections
592 Do not compress DWARF debug sections. This is the default.
593
594 @item -D
595 Ignored. This option is accepted for script compatibility with calls to
596 other assemblers.
597
598 @item --debug-prefix-map @var{old}=@var{new}
599 When assembling files in directory @file{@var{old}}, record debugging
600 information describing them as in @file{@var{new}} instead.
601
602 @item --defsym @var{sym}=@var{value}
603 Define the symbol @var{sym} to be @var{value} before assembling the input file.
604 @var{value} must be an integer constant. As in C, a leading @samp{0x}
605 indicates a hexadecimal value, and a leading @samp{0} indicates an octal
606 value. The value of the symbol can be overridden inside a source file via the
607 use of a @code{.set} pseudo-op.
608
609 @item -f
610 ``fast''---skip whitespace and comment preprocessing (assume source is
611 compiler output).
612
613 @item -g
614 @itemx --gen-debug
615 Generate debugging information for each assembler source line using whichever
616 debug format is preferred by the target. This currently means either STABS,
617 ECOFF or DWARF2.
618
619 @item --gstabs
620 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line. This
621 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.
622
623 @item --gstabs+
624 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line, with GNU
625 extensions that probably only gdb can handle, and that could make other
626 debuggers crash or refuse to read your program. This
627 may help debugging assembler code. Currently the only GNU extension is
628 the location of the current working directory at assembling time.
629
630 @item --gdwarf-2
631 Generate DWARF2 debugging information for each assembler line. This
632 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it. Note---this
633 option is only supported by some targets, not all of them.
634
635 @item --size-check=error
636 @itemx --size-check=warning
637 Issue an error or warning for invalid ELF .size directive.
638
639 @item --help
640 Print a summary of the command line options and exit.
641
642 @item --target-help
643 Print a summary of all target specific options and exit.
644
645 @item -I @var{dir}
646 Add directory @var{dir} to the search list for @code{.include} directives.
647
648 @item -J
649 Don't warn about signed overflow.
650
651 @item -K
652 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
653 This option is accepted but has no effect on the @value{TARGET} family.
654 @end ifclear
655 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
656 Issue warnings when difference tables altered for long displacements.
657 @end ifset
658
659 @item -L
660 @itemx --keep-locals
661 Keep (in the symbol table) local symbols. These symbols start with
662 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
663 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.
664 @ifclear man
665 @xref{Symbol Names}.
666 @end ifclear
667
668 @item --listing-lhs-width=@var{number}
669 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for an assembler
670 listing to @var{number}.
671
672 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@var{number}
673 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for continuation
674 lines in an assembler listing to @var{number}.
675
676 @item --listing-rhs-width=@var{number}
677 Set the maximum width of an input source line, as displayed in a listing, to
678 @var{number} bytes.
679
680 @item --listing-cont-lines=@var{number}
681 Set the maximum number of lines printed in a listing for a single line of input
682 to @var{number} + 1.
683
684 @item -o @var{objfile}
685 Name the object-file output from @command{@value{AS}} @var{objfile}.
686
687 @item -R
688 Fold the data section into the text section.
689
690 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
691 Set the default size of GAS's hash tables to a prime number close to
692 @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of time it takes the
693 assembler to perform its tasks, at the expense of increasing the assembler's
694 memory requirements. Similarly reducing this value can reduce the memory
695 requirements at the expense of speed.
696
697 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
698 This option reduces GAS's memory requirements, at the expense of making the
699 assembly processes slower. Currently this switch is a synonym for
700 @samp{--hash-size=4051}, but in the future it may have other effects as well.
701
702 @item --statistics
703 Print the maximum space (in bytes) and total time (in seconds) used by
704 assembly.
705
706 @item --strip-local-absolute
707 Remove local absolute symbols from the outgoing symbol table.
708
709 @item -v
710 @itemx -version
711 Print the @command{as} version.
712
713 @item --version
714 Print the @command{as} version and exit.
715
716 @item -W
717 @itemx --no-warn
718 Suppress warning messages.
719
720 @item --fatal-warnings
721 Treat warnings as errors.
722
723 @item --warn
724 Don't suppress warning messages or treat them as errors.
725
726 @item -w
727 Ignored.
728
729 @item -x
730 Ignored.
731
732 @item -Z
733 Generate an object file even after errors.
734
735 @item -- | @var{files} @dots{}
736 Standard input, or source files to assemble.
737
738 @end table
739 @c man end
740
741 @ifset AARCH64
742
743 @ifclear man
744 @xref{AArch64 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
745 for the 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
746 @end ifclear
747
748 @ifset man
749 @c man begin OPTIONS
750 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
751 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
752 @c man end
753 @c man begin INCLUDE
754 @include c-aarch64.texi
755 @c ended inside the included file
756 @end ifset
757
758 @end ifset
759
760 @ifset ALPHA
761
762 @ifclear man
763 @xref{Alpha Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
764 for an Alpha processor.
765 @end ifclear
766
767 @ifset man
768 @c man begin OPTIONS
769 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an Alpha
770 processor.
771 @c man end
772 @c man begin INCLUDE
773 @include c-alpha.texi
774 @c ended inside the included file
775 @end ifset
776
777 @end ifset
778
779 @c man begin OPTIONS
780 @ifset ARC
781 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
782 an ARC processor.
783
784 @table @gcctabopt
785 @item -marc[5|6|7|8]
786 This option selects the core processor variant.
787 @item -EB | -EL
788 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
789 @end table
790 @end ifset
791
792 @ifset ARM
793 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the ARM
794 processor family.
795
796 @table @gcctabopt
797 @item -mcpu=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
798 Specify which ARM processor variant is the target.
799 @item -march=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
800 Specify which ARM architecture variant is used by the target.
801 @item -mfpu=@var{floating-point-format}
802 Select which Floating Point architecture is the target.
803 @item -mfloat-abi=@var{abi}
804 Select which floating point ABI is in use.
805 @item -mthumb
806 Enable Thumb only instruction decoding.
807 @item -mapcs-32 | -mapcs-26 | -mapcs-float | -mapcs-reentrant
808 Select which procedure calling convention is in use.
809 @item -EB | -EL
810 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
811 @item -mthumb-interwork
812 Specify that the code has been generated with interworking between Thumb and
813 ARM code in mind.
814 @item -k
815 Specify that PIC code has been generated.
816 @end table
817 @end ifset
818 @c man end
819
820 @ifset Blackfin
821
822 @ifclear man
823 @xref{Blackfin Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
824 configured for the Blackfin processor family.
825 @end ifclear
826
827 @ifset man
828 @c man begin OPTIONS
829 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
830 the Blackfin processor family.
831 @c man end
832 @c man begin INCLUDE
833 @include c-bfin.texi
834 @c ended inside the included file
835 @end ifset
836
837 @end ifset
838
839 @c man begin OPTIONS
840 @ifset CRIS
841 See the info pages for documentation of the CRIS-specific options.
842 @end ifset
843
844 @ifset D10V
845 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
846 a D10V processor.
847 @table @gcctabopt
848 @cindex D10V optimization
849 @cindex optimization, D10V
850 @item -O
851 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
852 @end table
853 @end ifset
854
855 @ifset D30V
856 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a D30V
857 processor.
858 @table @gcctabopt
859 @cindex D30V optimization
860 @cindex optimization, D30V
861 @item -O
862 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
863
864 @cindex D30V nops
865 @item -n
866 Warn when nops are generated.
867
868 @cindex D30V nops after 32-bit multiply
869 @item -N
870 Warn when a nop after a 32-bit multiply instruction is generated.
871 @end table
872 @end ifset
873 @c man end
874
875 @ifset EPIPHANY
876 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
877 Adapteva EPIPHANY series.
878
879 @ifclear man
880 @xref{Epiphany Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
881 configured for an Epiphany processor.
882 @end ifclear
883
884 @ifset man
885 @c man begin OPTIONS
886 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
887 an Epiphany processor.
888 @c man end
889 @c man begin INCLUDE
890 @include c-epiphany.texi
891 @c ended inside the included file
892 @end ifset
893
894 @end ifset
895
896 @ifset I80386
897
898 @ifclear man
899 @xref{i386-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
900 configured for an i386 processor.
901 @end ifclear
902
903 @ifset man
904 @c man begin OPTIONS
905 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
906 an i386 processor.
907 @c man end
908 @c man begin INCLUDE
909 @include c-i386.texi
910 @c ended inside the included file
911 @end ifset
912
913 @end ifset
914
915 @c man begin OPTIONS
916 @ifset I960
917 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
918 Intel 80960 processor.
919
920 @table @gcctabopt
921 @item -ACA | -ACA_A | -ACB | -ACC | -AKA | -AKB | -AKC | -AMC
922 Specify which variant of the 960 architecture is the target.
923
924 @item -b
925 Add code to collect statistics about branches taken.
926
927 @item -no-relax
928 Do not alter compare-and-branch instructions for long displacements;
929 error if necessary.
930
931 @end table
932 @end ifset
933
934 @ifset IP2K
935 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
936 Ubicom IP2K series.
937
938 @table @gcctabopt
939
940 @item -mip2022ext
941 Specifies that the extended IP2022 instructions are allowed.
942
943 @item -mip2022
944 Restores the default behaviour, which restricts the permitted instructions to
945 just the basic IP2022 ones.
946
947 @end table
948 @end ifset
949
950 @ifset M32C
951 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
952 Renesas M32C and M16C processors.
953
954 @table @gcctabopt
955
956 @item -m32c
957 Assemble M32C instructions.
958
959 @item -m16c
960 Assemble M16C instructions (the default).
961
962 @item -relax
963 Enable support for link-time relaxations.
964
965 @item -h-tick-hex
966 Support H'00 style hex constants in addition to 0x00 style.
967
968 @end table
969 @end ifset
970
971 @ifset M32R
972 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
973 Renesas M32R (formerly Mitsubishi M32R) series.
974
975 @table @gcctabopt
976
977 @item --m32rx
978 Specify which processor in the M32R family is the target. The default
979 is normally the M32R, but this option changes it to the M32RX.
980
981 @item --warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wp
982 Produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
983 encountered.
984
985 @item --no-warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wnp
986 Do not produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
987 encountered.
988
989 @end table
990 @end ifset
991
992 @ifset M680X0
993 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
994 Motorola 68000 series.
995
996 @table @gcctabopt
997
998 @item -l
999 Shorten references to undefined symbols, to one word instead of two.
1000
1001 @item -m68000 | -m68008 | -m68010 | -m68020 | -m68030
1002 @itemx | -m68040 | -m68060 | -m68302 | -m68331 | -m68332
1003 @itemx | -m68333 | -m68340 | -mcpu32 | -m5200
1004 Specify what processor in the 68000 family is the target. The default
1005 is normally the 68020, but this can be changed at configuration time.
1006
1007 @item -m68881 | -m68882 | -mno-68881 | -mno-68882
1008 The target machine does (or does not) have a floating-point coprocessor.
1009 The default is to assume a coprocessor for 68020, 68030, and cpu32. Although
1010 the basic 68000 is not compatible with the 68881, a combination of the
1011 two can be specified, since it's possible to do emulation of the
1012 coprocessor instructions with the main processor.
1013
1014 @item -m68851 | -mno-68851
1015 The target machine does (or does not) have a memory-management
1016 unit coprocessor. The default is to assume an MMU for 68020 and up.
1017
1018 @end table
1019 @end ifset
1020
1021 @ifset PDP11
1022
1023 For details about the PDP-11 machine dependent features options,
1024 see @ref{PDP-11-Options}.
1025
1026 @table @gcctabopt
1027 @item -mpic | -mno-pic
1028 Generate position-independent (or position-dependent) code. The
1029 default is @option{-mpic}.
1030
1031 @item -mall
1032 @itemx -mall-extensions
1033 Enable all instruction set extensions. This is the default.
1034
1035 @item -mno-extensions
1036 Disable all instruction set extensions.
1037
1038 @item -m@var{extension} | -mno-@var{extension}
1039 Enable (or disable) a particular instruction set extension.
1040
1041 @item -m@var{cpu}
1042 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular CPU, and
1043 disable all other extensions.
1044
1045 @item -m@var{machine}
1046 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular machine
1047 model, and disable all other extensions.
1048 @end table
1049
1050 @end ifset
1051
1052 @ifset PJ
1053 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1054 a picoJava processor.
1055
1056 @table @gcctabopt
1057
1058 @cindex PJ endianness
1059 @cindex endianness, PJ
1060 @cindex big endian output, PJ
1061 @item -mb
1062 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1063
1064 @cindex little endian output, PJ
1065 @item -ml
1066 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1067
1068 @end table
1069 @end ifset
1070
1071 @ifset M68HC11
1072 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1073 Motorola 68HC11 or 68HC12 series.
1074
1075 @table @gcctabopt
1076
1077 @item -m68hc11 | -m68hc12 | -m68hcs12 | -mm9s12x | -mm9s12xg
1078 Specify what processor is the target. The default is
1079 defined by the configuration option when building the assembler.
1080
1081 @item --xgate-ramoffset
1082 Instruct the linker to offset RAM addresses from S12X address space into
1083 XGATE address space.
1084
1085 @item -mshort
1086 Specify to use the 16-bit integer ABI.
1087
1088 @item -mlong
1089 Specify to use the 32-bit integer ABI.
1090
1091 @item -mshort-double
1092 Specify to use the 32-bit double ABI.
1093
1094 @item -mlong-double
1095 Specify to use the 64-bit double ABI.
1096
1097 @item --force-long-branches
1098 Relative branches are turned into absolute ones. This concerns
1099 conditional branches, unconditional branches and branches to a
1100 sub routine.
1101
1102 @item -S | --short-branches
1103 Do not turn relative branches into absolute ones
1104 when the offset is out of range.
1105
1106 @item --strict-direct-mode
1107 Do not turn the direct addressing mode into extended addressing mode
1108 when the instruction does not support direct addressing mode.
1109
1110 @item --print-insn-syntax
1111 Print the syntax of instruction in case of error.
1112
1113 @item --print-opcodes
1114 Print the list of instructions with syntax and then exit.
1115
1116 @item --generate-example
1117 Print an example of instruction for each possible instruction and then exit.
1118 This option is only useful for testing @command{@value{AS}}.
1119
1120 @end table
1121 @end ifset
1122
1123 @ifset SPARC
1124 The following options are available when @command{@value{AS}} is configured
1125 for the SPARC architecture:
1126
1127 @table @gcctabopt
1128 @item -Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Asparclet | -Asparclite
1129 @itemx -Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av9 | -Av9a
1130 Explicitly select a variant of the SPARC architecture.
1131
1132 @samp{-Av8plus} and @samp{-Av8plusa} select a 32 bit environment.
1133 @samp{-Av9} and @samp{-Av9a} select a 64 bit environment.
1134
1135 @samp{-Av8plusa} and @samp{-Av9a} enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with
1136 UltraSPARC extensions.
1137
1138 @item -xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa
1139 For compatibility with the Solaris v9 assembler. These options are
1140 equivalent to -Av8plus and -Av8plusa, respectively.
1141
1142 @item -bump
1143 Warn when the assembler switches to another architecture.
1144 @end table
1145 @end ifset
1146
1147 @ifset TIC54X
1148 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 'c54x
1149 architecture.
1150
1151 @table @gcctabopt
1152 @item -mfar-mode
1153 Enable extended addressing mode. All addresses and relocations will assume
1154 extended addressing (usually 23 bits).
1155 @item -mcpu=@var{CPU_VERSION}
1156 Sets the CPU version being compiled for.
1157 @item -merrors-to-file @var{FILENAME}
1158 Redirect error output to a file, for broken systems which don't support such
1159 behaviour in the shell.
1160 @end table
1161 @end ifset
1162
1163 @ifset MIPS
1164 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1165 a @sc{mips} processor.
1166
1167 @table @gcctabopt
1168 @item -G @var{num}
1169 This option sets the largest size of an object that can be referenced
1170 implicitly with the @code{gp} register. It is only accepted for targets that
1171 use ECOFF format, such as a DECstation running Ultrix. The default value is 8.
1172
1173 @cindex MIPS endianness
1174 @cindex endianness, MIPS
1175 @cindex big endian output, MIPS
1176 @item -EB
1177 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1178
1179 @cindex little endian output, MIPS
1180 @item -EL
1181 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1182
1183 @cindex MIPS ISA
1184 @item -mips1
1185 @itemx -mips2
1186 @itemx -mips3
1187 @itemx -mips4
1188 @itemx -mips5
1189 @itemx -mips32
1190 @itemx -mips32r2
1191 @itemx -mips64
1192 @itemx -mips64r2
1193 Generate code for a particular @sc{mips} Instruction Set Architecture level.
1194 @samp{-mips1} is an alias for @samp{-march=r3000}, @samp{-mips2} is an
1195 alias for @samp{-march=r6000}, @samp{-mips3} is an alias for
1196 @samp{-march=r4000} and @samp{-mips4} is an alias for @samp{-march=r8000}.
1197 @samp{-mips5}, @samp{-mips32}, @samp{-mips32r2}, @samp{-mips64}, and
1198 @samp{-mips64r2}
1199 correspond to generic
1200 @samp{MIPS V}, @samp{MIPS32}, @samp{MIPS32 Release 2}, @samp{MIPS64},
1201 and @samp{MIPS64 Release 2}
1202 ISA processors, respectively.
1203
1204 @item -march=@var{CPU}
1205 Generate code for a particular @sc{mips} cpu.
1206
1207 @item -mtune=@var{cpu}
1208 Schedule and tune for a particular @sc{mips} cpu.
1209
1210 @item -mfix7000
1211 @itemx -mno-fix7000
1212 Cause nops to be inserted if the read of the destination register
1213 of an mfhi or mflo instruction occurs in the following two instructions.
1214
1215 @item -mdebug
1216 @itemx -no-mdebug
1217 Cause stabs-style debugging output to go into an ECOFF-style .mdebug
1218 section instead of the standard ELF .stabs sections.
1219
1220 @item -mpdr
1221 @itemx -mno-pdr
1222 Control generation of @code{.pdr} sections.
1223
1224 @item -mgp32
1225 @itemx -mfp32
1226 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1227 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 32 bits wide at
1228 all times. @samp{-mgp32} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1229 and @samp{-mfp32} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1230
1231 @item -mips16
1232 @itemx -no-mips16
1233 Generate code for the MIPS 16 processor. This is equivalent to putting
1234 @code{.set mips16} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-no-mips16}
1235 turns off this option.
1236
1237 @item -mmicromips
1238 @itemx -mno-micromips
1239 Generate code for the microMIPS processor. This is equivalent to putting
1240 @code{.set micromips} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-micromips}
1241 turns off this option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set nomicromips}
1242 at the start of the assembly file.
1243
1244 @item -msmartmips
1245 @itemx -mno-smartmips
1246 Enables the SmartMIPS extension to the MIPS32 instruction set. This is
1247 equivalent to putting @code{.set smartmips} at the start of the assembly file.
1248 @samp{-mno-smartmips} turns off this option.
1249
1250 @item -mips3d
1251 @itemx -no-mips3d
1252 Generate code for the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension.
1253 This tells the assembler to accept MIPS-3D instructions.
1254 @samp{-no-mips3d} turns off this option.
1255
1256 @item -mdmx
1257 @itemx -no-mdmx
1258 Generate code for the MDMX Application Specific Extension.
1259 This tells the assembler to accept MDMX instructions.
1260 @samp{-no-mdmx} turns off this option.
1261
1262 @item -mdsp
1263 @itemx -mno-dsp
1264 Generate code for the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension.
1265 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 1 instructions.
1266 @samp{-mno-dsp} turns off this option.
1267
1268 @item -mdspr2
1269 @itemx -mno-dspr2
1270 Generate code for the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension.
1271 This option implies -mdsp.
1272 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 2 instructions.
1273 @samp{-mno-dspr2} turns off this option.
1274
1275 @item -mmt
1276 @itemx -mno-mt
1277 Generate code for the MT Application Specific Extension.
1278 This tells the assembler to accept MT instructions.
1279 @samp{-mno-mt} turns off this option.
1280
1281 @item -mmcu
1282 @itemx -mno-mcu
1283 Generate code for the MCU Application Specific Extension.
1284 This tells the assembler to accept MCU instructions.
1285 @samp{-mno-mcu} turns off this option.
1286
1287 @item --construct-floats
1288 @itemx --no-construct-floats
1289 The @samp{--no-construct-floats} option disables the construction of
1290 double width floating point constants by loading the two halves of the
1291 value into the two single width floating point registers that make up
1292 the double width register. By default @samp{--construct-floats} is
1293 selected, allowing construction of these floating point constants.
1294
1295 @cindex emulation
1296 @item --emulation=@var{name}
1297 This option causes @command{@value{AS}} to emulate @command{@value{AS}} configured
1298 for some other target, in all respects, including output format (choosing
1299 between ELF and ECOFF only), handling of pseudo-opcodes which may generate
1300 debugging information or store symbol table information, and default
1301 endianness. The available configuration names are: @samp{mipsecoff},
1302 @samp{mipself}, @samp{mipslecoff}, @samp{mipsbecoff}, @samp{mipslelf},
1303 @samp{mipsbelf}. The first two do not alter the default endianness from that
1304 of the primary target for which the assembler was configured; the others change
1305 the default to little- or big-endian as indicated by the @samp{b} or @samp{l}
1306 in the name. Using @samp{-EB} or @samp{-EL} will override the endianness
1307 selection in any case.
1308
1309 This option is currently supported only when the primary target
1310 @command{@value{AS}} is configured for is a @sc{mips} ELF or ECOFF target.
1311 Furthermore, the primary target or others specified with
1312 @samp{--enable-targets=@dots{}} at configuration time must include support for
1313 the other format, if both are to be available. For example, the Irix 5
1314 configuration includes support for both.
1315
1316 Eventually, this option will support more configurations, with more
1317 fine-grained control over the assembler's behavior, and will be supported for
1318 more processors.
1319
1320 @item -nocpp
1321 @command{@value{AS}} ignores this option. It is accepted for compatibility with
1322 the native tools.
1323
1324 @item --trap
1325 @itemx --no-trap
1326 @itemx --break
1327 @itemx --no-break
1328 Control how to deal with multiplication overflow and division by zero.
1329 @samp{--trap} or @samp{--no-break} (which are synonyms) take a trap exception
1330 (and only work for Instruction Set Architecture level 2 and higher);
1331 @samp{--break} or @samp{--no-trap} (also synonyms, and the default) take a
1332 break exception.
1333
1334 @item -n
1335 When this option is used, @command{@value{AS}} will issue a warning every
1336 time it generates a nop instruction from a macro.
1337 @end table
1338 @end ifset
1339
1340 @ifset MCORE
1341 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1342 an MCore processor.
1343
1344 @table @gcctabopt
1345 @item -jsri2bsr
1346 @itemx -nojsri2bsr
1347 Enable or disable the JSRI to BSR transformation. By default this is enabled.
1348 The command line option @samp{-nojsri2bsr} can be used to disable it.
1349
1350 @item -sifilter
1351 @itemx -nosifilter
1352 Enable or disable the silicon filter behaviour. By default this is disabled.
1353 The default can be overridden by the @samp{-sifilter} command line option.
1354
1355 @item -relax
1356 Alter jump instructions for long displacements.
1357
1358 @item -mcpu=[210|340]
1359 Select the cpu type on the target hardware. This controls which instructions
1360 can be assembled.
1361
1362 @item -EB
1363 Assemble for a big endian target.
1364
1365 @item -EL
1366 Assemble for a little endian target.
1367
1368 @end table
1369 @end ifset
1370
1371 @ifset MMIX
1372 See the info pages for documentation of the MMIX-specific options.
1373 @end ifset
1374
1375 @c man end
1376 @ifset PPC
1377
1378 @ifclear man
1379 @xref{PowerPC-Opts}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1380 for a PowerPC processor.
1381 @end ifclear
1382
1383 @ifset man
1384 @c man begin OPTIONS
1385 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1386 PowerPC processor.
1387 @c man end
1388 @c man begin INCLUDE
1389 @include c-ppc.texi
1390 @c ended inside the included file
1391 @end ifset
1392
1393 @end ifset
1394
1395 @c man begin OPTIONS
1396 @ifset RX
1397 See the info pages for documentation of the RX-specific options.
1398 @end ifset
1399
1400 @ifset S390
1401 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the s390
1402 processor family.
1403
1404 @table @gcctabopt
1405 @item -m31
1406 @itemx -m64
1407 Select the word size, either 31/32 bits or 64 bits.
1408 @item -mesa
1409 @item -mzarch
1410 Select the architecture mode, either the Enterprise System
1411 Architecture (esa) or the z/Architecture mode (zarch).
1412 @item -march=@var{processor}
1413 Specify which s390 processor variant is the target, @samp{g6}, @samp{g6},
1414 @samp{z900}, @samp{z990}, @samp{z9-109}, @samp{z9-ec}, @samp{z10},
1415 @samp{z196}, or @samp{zEC12}.
1416 @item -mregnames
1417 @itemx -mno-regnames
1418 Allow or disallow symbolic names for registers.
1419 @item -mwarn-areg-zero
1420 Warn whenever the operand for a base or index register has been specified
1421 but evaluates to zero.
1422 @end table
1423 @end ifset
1424 @c man end
1425
1426 @ifset TIC6X
1427
1428 @ifclear man
1429 @xref{TIC6X Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1430 for a TMS320C6000 processor.
1431 @end ifclear
1432
1433 @ifset man
1434 @c man begin OPTIONS
1435 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1436 TMS320C6000 processor.
1437 @c man end
1438 @c man begin INCLUDE
1439 @include c-tic6x.texi
1440 @c ended inside the included file
1441 @end ifset
1442
1443 @end ifset
1444
1445 @ifset TILEGX
1446
1447 @ifclear man
1448 @xref{TILE-Gx Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1449 for a TILE-Gx processor.
1450 @end ifclear
1451
1452 @ifset man
1453 @c man begin OPTIONS
1454 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a TILE-Gx
1455 processor.
1456 @c man end
1457 @c man begin INCLUDE
1458 @include c-tilegx.texi
1459 @c ended inside the included file
1460 @end ifset
1461
1462 @end ifset
1463
1464 @ifset XTENSA
1465
1466 @ifclear man
1467 @xref{Xtensa Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1468 for an Xtensa processor.
1469 @end ifclear
1470
1471 @ifset man
1472 @c man begin OPTIONS
1473 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1474 Xtensa processor.
1475 @c man end
1476 @c man begin INCLUDE
1477 @include c-xtensa.texi
1478 @c ended inside the included file
1479 @end ifset
1480
1481 @end ifset
1482
1483 @c man begin OPTIONS
1484
1485 @ifset Z80
1486 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1487 a Z80 family processor.
1488 @table @gcctabopt
1489 @item -z80
1490 Assemble for Z80 processor.
1491 @item -r800
1492 Assemble for R800 processor.
1493 @item -ignore-undocumented-instructions
1494 @itemx -Wnud
1495 Assemble undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800 without warning.
1496 @item -ignore-unportable-instructions
1497 @itemx -Wnup
1498 Assemble all undocumented Z80 instructions without warning.
1499 @item -warn-undocumented-instructions
1500 @itemx -Wud
1501 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800.
1502 @item -warn-unportable-instructions
1503 @itemx -Wup
1504 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800.
1505 @item -forbid-undocumented-instructions
1506 @itemx -Fud
1507 Treat all undocumented instructions as errors.
1508 @item -forbid-unportable-instructions
1509 @itemx -Fup
1510 Treat undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800 as errors.
1511 @end table
1512 @end ifset
1513
1514 @c man end
1515
1516 @menu
1517 * Manual:: Structure of this Manual
1518 * GNU Assembler:: The GNU Assembler
1519 * Object Formats:: Object File Formats
1520 * Command Line:: Command Line
1521 * Input Files:: Input Files
1522 * Object:: Output (Object) File
1523 * Errors:: Error and Warning Messages
1524 @end menu
1525
1526 @node Manual
1527 @section Structure of this Manual
1528
1529 @cindex manual, structure and purpose
1530 This manual is intended to describe what you need to know to use
1531 @sc{gnu} @command{@value{AS}}. We cover the syntax expected in source files, including
1532 notation for symbols, constants, and expressions; the directives that
1533 @command{@value{AS}} understands; and of course how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}.
1534
1535 @ifclear GENERIC
1536 We also cover special features in the @value{TARGET}
1537 configuration of @command{@value{AS}}, including assembler directives.
1538 @end ifclear
1539 @ifset GENERIC
1540 This manual also describes some of the machine-dependent features of
1541 various flavors of the assembler.
1542 @end ifset
1543
1544 @cindex machine instructions (not covered)
1545 On the other hand, this manual is @emph{not} intended as an introduction
1546 to programming in assembly language---let alone programming in general!
1547 In a similar vein, we make no attempt to introduce the machine
1548 architecture; we do @emph{not} describe the instruction set, standard
1549 mnemonics, registers or addressing modes that are standard to a
1550 particular architecture.
1551 @ifset GENERIC
1552 You may want to consult the manufacturer's
1553 machine architecture manual for this information.
1554 @end ifset
1555 @ifclear GENERIC
1556 @ifset H8/300
1557 For information on the H8/300 machine instruction set, see @cite{H8/300
1558 Series Programming Manual}. For the H8/300H, see @cite{H8/300H Series
1559 Programming Manual} (Renesas).
1560 @end ifset
1561 @ifset SH
1562 For information on the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) / SuperH SH machine instruction set,
1563 see @cite{SH-Microcomputer User's Manual} (Renesas) or
1564 @cite{SH-4 32-bit CPU Core Architecture} (SuperH) and
1565 @cite{SuperH (SH) 64-Bit RISC Series} (SuperH).
1566 @end ifset
1567 @ifset Z8000
1568 For information on the Z8000 machine instruction set, see @cite{Z8000 CPU Technical Manual}
1569 @end ifset
1570 @end ifclear
1571
1572 @c I think this is premature---doc@cygnus.com, 17jan1991
1573 @ignore
1574 Throughout this manual, we assume that you are running @dfn{GNU},
1575 the portable operating system from the @dfn{Free Software
1576 Foundation, Inc.}. This restricts our attention to certain kinds of
1577 computer (in particular, the kinds of computers that @sc{gnu} can run on);
1578 once this assumption is granted examples and definitions need less
1579 qualification.
1580
1581 @command{@value{AS}} is part of a team of programs that turn a high-level
1582 human-readable series of instructions into a low-level
1583 computer-readable series of instructions. Different versions of
1584 @command{@value{AS}} are used for different kinds of computer.
1585 @end ignore
1586
1587 @c There used to be a section "Terminology" here, which defined
1588 @c "contents", "byte", "word", and "long". Defining "word" to any
1589 @c particular size is confusing when the .word directive may generate 16
1590 @c bits on one machine and 32 bits on another; in general, for the user
1591 @c version of this manual, none of these terms seem essential to define.
1592 @c They were used very little even in the former draft of the manual;
1593 @c this draft makes an effort to avoid them (except in names of
1594 @c directives).
1595
1596 @node GNU Assembler
1597 @section The GNU Assembler
1598
1599 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1600
1601 @sc{gnu} @command{as} is really a family of assemblers.
1602 @ifclear GENERIC
1603 This manual describes @command{@value{AS}}, a member of that family which is
1604 configured for the @value{TARGET} architectures.
1605 @end ifclear
1606 If you use (or have used) the @sc{gnu} assembler on one architecture, you
1607 should find a fairly similar environment when you use it on another
1608 architecture. Each version has much in common with the others,
1609 including object file formats, most assembler directives (often called
1610 @dfn{pseudo-ops}) and assembler syntax.@refill
1611
1612 @cindex purpose of @sc{gnu} assembler
1613 @command{@value{AS}} is primarily intended to assemble the output of the
1614 @sc{gnu} C compiler @code{@value{GCC}} for use by the linker
1615 @code{@value{LD}}. Nevertheless, we've tried to make @command{@value{AS}}
1616 assemble correctly everything that other assemblers for the same
1617 machine would assemble.
1618 @ifset VAX
1619 Any exceptions are documented explicitly (@pxref{Machine Dependencies}).
1620 @end ifset
1621 @ifset M680X0
1622 @c This remark should appear in generic version of manual; assumption
1623 @c here is that generic version sets M680x0.
1624 This doesn't mean @command{@value{AS}} always uses the same syntax as another
1625 assembler for the same architecture; for example, we know of several
1626 incompatible versions of 680x0 assembly language syntax.
1627 @end ifset
1628
1629 @c man end
1630
1631 Unlike older assemblers, @command{@value{AS}} is designed to assemble a source
1632 program in one pass of the source file. This has a subtle impact on the
1633 @kbd{.org} directive (@pxref{Org,,@code{.org}}).
1634
1635 @node Object Formats
1636 @section Object File Formats
1637
1638 @cindex object file format
1639 The @sc{gnu} assembler can be configured to produce several alternative
1640 object file formats. For the most part, this does not affect how you
1641 write assembly language programs; but directives for debugging symbols
1642 are typically different in different file formats. @xref{Symbol
1643 Attributes,,Symbol Attributes}.
1644 @ifclear GENERIC
1645 @ifclear MULTI-OBJ
1646 For the @value{TARGET} target, @command{@value{AS}} is configured to produce
1647 @value{OBJ-NAME} format object files.
1648 @end ifclear
1649 @c The following should exhaust all configs that set MULTI-OBJ, ideally
1650 @ifset I960
1651 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1652 @code{b.out} or COFF format object files.
1653 @end ifset
1654 @ifset HPPA
1655 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1656 SOM or ELF format object files.
1657 @end ifset
1658 @end ifclear
1659
1660 @node Command Line
1661 @section Command Line
1662
1663 @cindex command line conventions
1664
1665 After the program name @command{@value{AS}}, the command line may contain
1666 options and file names. Options may appear in any order, and may be
1667 before, after, or between file names. The order of file names is
1668 significant.
1669
1670 @cindex standard input, as input file
1671 @kindex --
1672 @file{--} (two hyphens) by itself names the standard input file
1673 explicitly, as one of the files for @command{@value{AS}} to assemble.
1674
1675 @cindex options, command line
1676 Except for @samp{--} any command line argument that begins with a
1677 hyphen (@samp{-}) is an option. Each option changes the behavior of
1678 @command{@value{AS}}. No option changes the way another option works. An
1679 option is a @samp{-} followed by one or more letters; the case of
1680 the letter is important. All options are optional.
1681
1682 Some options expect exactly one file name to follow them. The file
1683 name may either immediately follow the option's letter (compatible
1684 with older assemblers) or it may be the next command argument (@sc{gnu}
1685 standard). These two command lines are equivalent:
1686
1687 @smallexample
1688 @value{AS} -o my-object-file.o mumble.s
1689 @value{AS} -omy-object-file.o mumble.s
1690 @end smallexample
1691
1692 @node Input Files
1693 @section Input Files
1694
1695 @cindex input
1696 @cindex source program
1697 @cindex files, input
1698 We use the phrase @dfn{source program}, abbreviated @dfn{source}, to
1699 describe the program input to one run of @command{@value{AS}}. The program may
1700 be in one or more files; how the source is partitioned into files
1701 doesn't change the meaning of the source.
1702
1703 @c I added "con" prefix to "catenation" just to prove I can overcome my
1704 @c APL training... doc@cygnus.com
1705 The source program is a concatenation of the text in all the files, in the
1706 order specified.
1707
1708 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1709 Each time you run @command{@value{AS}} it assembles exactly one source
1710 program. The source program is made up of one or more files.
1711 (The standard input is also a file.)
1712
1713 You give @command{@value{AS}} a command line that has zero or more input file
1714 names. The input files are read (from left file name to right). A
1715 command line argument (in any position) that has no special meaning
1716 is taken to be an input file name.
1717
1718 If you give @command{@value{AS}} no file names it attempts to read one input file
1719 from the @command{@value{AS}} standard input, which is normally your terminal. You
1720 may have to type @key{ctl-D} to tell @command{@value{AS}} there is no more program
1721 to assemble.
1722
1723 Use @samp{--} if you need to explicitly name the standard input file
1724 in your command line.
1725
1726 If the source is empty, @command{@value{AS}} produces a small, empty object
1727 file.
1728
1729 @c man end
1730
1731 @subheading Filenames and Line-numbers
1732
1733 @cindex input file linenumbers
1734 @cindex line numbers, in input files
1735 There are two ways of locating a line in the input file (or files) and
1736 either may be used in reporting error messages. One way refers to a line
1737 number in a physical file; the other refers to a line number in a
1738 ``logical'' file. @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
1739
1740 @dfn{Physical files} are those files named in the command line given
1741 to @command{@value{AS}}.
1742
1743 @dfn{Logical files} are simply names declared explicitly by assembler
1744 directives; they bear no relation to physical files. Logical file names help
1745 error messages reflect the original source file, when @command{@value{AS}} source
1746 is itself synthesized from other files. @command{@value{AS}} understands the
1747 @samp{#} directives emitted by the @code{@value{GCC}} preprocessor. See also
1748 @ref{File,,@code{.file}}.
1749
1750 @node Object
1751 @section Output (Object) File
1752
1753 @cindex object file
1754 @cindex output file
1755 @kindex a.out
1756 @kindex .o
1757 Every time you run @command{@value{AS}} it produces an output file, which is
1758 your assembly language program translated into numbers. This file
1759 is the object file. Its default name is
1760 @ifclear BOUT
1761 @code{a.out}.
1762 @end ifclear
1763 @ifset BOUT
1764 @ifset GENERIC
1765 @code{a.out}, or
1766 @end ifset
1767 @code{b.out} when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for the Intel 80960.
1768 @end ifset
1769 You can give it another name by using the @option{-o} option. Conventionally,
1770 object file names end with @file{.o}. The default name is used for historical
1771 reasons: older assemblers were capable of assembling self-contained programs
1772 directly into a runnable program. (For some formats, this isn't currently
1773 possible, but it can be done for the @code{a.out} format.)
1774
1775 @cindex linker
1776 @kindex ld
1777 The object file is meant for input to the linker @code{@value{LD}}. It contains
1778 assembled program code, information to help @code{@value{LD}} integrate
1779 the assembled program into a runnable file, and (optionally) symbolic
1780 information for the debugger.
1781
1782 @c link above to some info file(s) like the description of a.out.
1783 @c don't forget to describe @sc{gnu} info as well as Unix lossage.
1784
1785 @node Errors
1786 @section Error and Warning Messages
1787
1788 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1789
1790 @cindex error messages
1791 @cindex warning messages
1792 @cindex messages from assembler
1793 @command{@value{AS}} may write warnings and error messages to the standard error
1794 file (usually your terminal). This should not happen when a compiler
1795 runs @command{@value{AS}} automatically. Warnings report an assumption made so
1796 that @command{@value{AS}} could keep assembling a flawed program; errors report a
1797 grave problem that stops the assembly.
1798
1799 @c man end
1800
1801 @cindex format of warning messages
1802 Warning messages have the format
1803
1804 @smallexample
1805 file_name:@b{NNN}:Warning Message Text
1806 @end smallexample
1807
1808 @noindent
1809 @cindex line numbers, in warnings/errors
1810 (where @b{NNN} is a line number). If a logical file name has been given
1811 (@pxref{File,,@code{.file}}) it is used for the filename, otherwise the name of
1812 the current input file is used. If a logical line number was given
1813 @ifset GENERIC
1814 (@pxref{Line,,@code{.line}})
1815 @end ifset
1816 then it is used to calculate the number printed,
1817 otherwise the actual line in the current source file is printed. The
1818 message text is intended to be self explanatory (in the grand Unix
1819 tradition).
1820
1821 @cindex format of error messages
1822 Error messages have the format
1823 @smallexample
1824 file_name:@b{NNN}:FATAL:Error Message Text
1825 @end smallexample
1826 The file name and line number are derived as for warning
1827 messages. The actual message text may be rather less explanatory
1828 because many of them aren't supposed to happen.
1829
1830 @node Invoking
1831 @chapter Command-Line Options
1832
1833 @cindex options, all versions of assembler
1834 This chapter describes command-line options available in @emph{all}
1835 versions of the @sc{gnu} assembler; see @ref{Machine Dependencies},
1836 for options specific
1837 @ifclear GENERIC
1838 to the @value{TARGET} target.
1839 @end ifclear
1840 @ifset GENERIC
1841 to particular machine architectures.
1842 @end ifset
1843
1844 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1845
1846 If you are invoking @command{@value{AS}} via the @sc{gnu} C compiler,
1847 you can use the @samp{-Wa} option to pass arguments through to the assembler.
1848 The assembler arguments must be separated from each other (and the @samp{-Wa})
1849 by commas. For example:
1850
1851 @smallexample
1852 gcc -c -g -O -Wa,-alh,-L file.c
1853 @end smallexample
1854
1855 @noindent
1856 This passes two options to the assembler: @samp{-alh} (emit a listing to
1857 standard output with high-level and assembly source) and @samp{-L} (retain
1858 local symbols in the symbol table).
1859
1860 Usually you do not need to use this @samp{-Wa} mechanism, since many compiler
1861 command-line options are automatically passed to the assembler by the compiler.
1862 (You can call the @sc{gnu} compiler driver with the @samp{-v} option to see
1863 precisely what options it passes to each compilation pass, including the
1864 assembler.)
1865
1866 @c man end
1867
1868 @menu
1869 * a:: -a[cdghlns] enable listings
1870 * alternate:: --alternate enable alternate macro syntax
1871 * D:: -D for compatibility
1872 * f:: -f to work faster
1873 * I:: -I for .include search path
1874 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
1875 * K:: -K for compatibility
1876 @end ifclear
1877 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
1878 * K:: -K for difference tables
1879 @end ifset
1880
1881 * L:: -L to retain local symbols
1882 * listing:: --listing-XXX to configure listing output
1883 * M:: -M or --mri to assemble in MRI compatibility mode
1884 * MD:: --MD for dependency tracking
1885 * o:: -o to name the object file
1886 * R:: -R to join data and text sections
1887 * statistics:: --statistics to see statistics about assembly
1888 * traditional-format:: --traditional-format for compatible output
1889 * v:: -v to announce version
1890 * W:: -W, --no-warn, --warn, --fatal-warnings to control warnings
1891 * Z:: -Z to make object file even after errors
1892 @end menu
1893
1894 @node a
1895 @section Enable Listings: @option{-a[cdghlns]}
1896
1897 @kindex -a
1898 @kindex -ac
1899 @kindex -ad
1900 @kindex -ag
1901 @kindex -ah
1902 @kindex -al
1903 @kindex -an
1904 @kindex -as
1905 @cindex listings, enabling
1906 @cindex assembly listings, enabling
1907
1908 These options enable listing output from the assembler. By itself,
1909 @samp{-a} requests high-level, assembly, and symbols listing.
1910 You can use other letters to select specific options for the list:
1911 @samp{-ah} requests a high-level language listing,
1912 @samp{-al} requests an output-program assembly listing, and
1913 @samp{-as} requests a symbol table listing.
1914 High-level listings require that a compiler debugging option like
1915 @samp{-g} be used, and that assembly listings (@samp{-al}) be requested
1916 also.
1917
1918 Use the @samp{-ag} option to print a first section with general assembly
1919 information, like @value{AS} version, switches passed, or time stamp.
1920
1921 Use the @samp{-ac} option to omit false conditionals from a listing. Any lines
1922 which are not assembled because of a false @code{.if} (or @code{.ifdef}, or any
1923 other conditional), or a true @code{.if} followed by an @code{.else}, will be
1924 omitted from the listing.
1925
1926 Use the @samp{-ad} option to omit debugging directives from the
1927 listing.
1928
1929 Once you have specified one of these options, you can further control
1930 listing output and its appearance using the directives @code{.list},
1931 @code{.nolist}, @code{.psize}, @code{.eject}, @code{.title}, and
1932 @code{.sbttl}.
1933 The @samp{-an} option turns off all forms processing.
1934 If you do not request listing output with one of the @samp{-a} options, the
1935 listing-control directives have no effect.
1936
1937 The letters after @samp{-a} may be combined into one option,
1938 @emph{e.g.}, @samp{-aln}.
1939
1940 Note if the assembler source is coming from the standard input (e.g.,
1941 because it
1942 is being created by @code{@value{GCC}} and the @samp{-pipe} command line switch
1943 is being used) then the listing will not contain any comments or preprocessor
1944 directives. This is because the listing code buffers input source lines from
1945 stdin only after they have been preprocessed by the assembler. This reduces
1946 memory usage and makes the code more efficient.
1947
1948 @node alternate
1949 @section @option{--alternate}
1950
1951 @kindex --alternate
1952 Begin in alternate macro mode, see @ref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
1953
1954 @node D
1955 @section @option{-D}
1956
1957 @kindex -D
1958 This option has no effect whatsoever, but it is accepted to make it more
1959 likely that scripts written for other assemblers also work with
1960 @command{@value{AS}}.
1961
1962 @node f
1963 @section Work Faster: @option{-f}
1964
1965 @kindex -f
1966 @cindex trusted compiler
1967 @cindex faster processing (@option{-f})
1968 @samp{-f} should only be used when assembling programs written by a
1969 (trusted) compiler. @samp{-f} stops the assembler from doing whitespace
1970 and comment preprocessing on
1971 the input file(s) before assembling them. @xref{Preprocessing,
1972 ,Preprocessing}.
1973
1974 @quotation
1975 @emph{Warning:} if you use @samp{-f} when the files actually need to be
1976 preprocessed (if they contain comments, for example), @command{@value{AS}} does
1977 not work correctly.
1978 @end quotation
1979
1980 @node I
1981 @section @code{.include} Search Path: @option{-I} @var{path}
1982
1983 @kindex -I @var{path}
1984 @cindex paths for @code{.include}
1985 @cindex search path for @code{.include}
1986 @cindex @code{include} directive search path
1987 Use this option to add a @var{path} to the list of directories
1988 @command{@value{AS}} searches for files specified in @code{.include}
1989 directives (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You may use @option{-I} as
1990 many times as necessary to include a variety of paths. The current
1991 working directory is always searched first; after that, @command{@value{AS}}
1992 searches any @samp{-I} directories in the same order as they were
1993 specified (left to right) on the command line.
1994
1995 @node K
1996 @section Difference Tables: @option{-K}
1997
1998 @kindex -K
1999 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2000 On the @value{TARGET} family, this option is allowed, but has no effect. It is
2001 permitted for compatibility with the @sc{gnu} assembler on other platforms,
2002 where it can be used to warn when the assembler alters the machine code
2003 generated for @samp{.word} directives in difference tables. The @value{TARGET}
2004 family does not have the addressing limitations that sometimes lead to this
2005 alteration on other platforms.
2006 @end ifclear
2007
2008 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2009 @cindex difference tables, warning
2010 @cindex warning for altered difference tables
2011 @command{@value{AS}} sometimes alters the code emitted for directives of the
2012 form @samp{.word @var{sym1}-@var{sym2}}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
2013 You can use the @samp{-K} option if you want a warning issued when this
2014 is done.
2015 @end ifset
2016
2017 @node L
2018 @section Include Local Symbols: @option{-L}
2019
2020 @kindex -L
2021 @cindex local symbols, retaining in output
2022 Symbols beginning with system-specific local label prefixes, typically
2023 @samp{.L} for ELF systems or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, are
2024 called @dfn{local symbols}. @xref{Symbol Names}. Normally you do not see
2025 such symbols when debugging, because they are intended for the use of
2026 programs (like compilers) that compose assembler programs, not for your
2027 notice. Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} discard
2028 such symbols, so you do not normally debug with them.
2029
2030 This option tells @command{@value{AS}} to retain those local symbols
2031 in the object file. Usually if you do this you also tell the linker
2032 @code{@value{LD}} to preserve those symbols.
2033
2034 @node listing
2035 @section Configuring listing output: @option{--listing}
2036
2037 The listing feature of the assembler can be enabled via the command line switch
2038 @samp{-a} (@pxref{a}). This feature combines the input source file(s) with a
2039 hex dump of the corresponding locations in the output object file, and displays
2040 them as a listing file. The format of this listing can be controlled by
2041 directives inside the assembler source (i.e., @code{.list} (@pxref{List}),
2042 @code{.title} (@pxref{Title}), @code{.sbttl} (@pxref{Sbttl}),
2043 @code{.psize} (@pxref{Psize}), and
2044 @code{.eject} (@pxref{Eject}) and also by the following switches:
2045
2046 @table @gcctabopt
2047 @item --listing-lhs-width=@samp{number}
2048 @kindex --listing-lhs-width
2049 @cindex Width of first line disassembly output
2050 Sets the maximum width, in words, of the first line of the hex byte dump. This
2051 dump appears on the left hand side of the listing output.
2052
2053 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@samp{number}
2054 @kindex --listing-lhs-width2
2055 @cindex Width of continuation lines of disassembly output
2056 Sets the maximum width, in words, of any further lines of the hex byte dump for
2057 a given input source line. If this value is not specified, it defaults to being
2058 the same as the value specified for @samp{--listing-lhs-width}. If neither
2059 switch is used the default is to one.
2060
2061 @item --listing-rhs-width=@samp{number}
2062 @kindex --listing-rhs-width
2063 @cindex Width of source line output
2064 Sets the maximum width, in characters, of the source line that is displayed
2065 alongside the hex dump. The default value for this parameter is 100. The
2066 source line is displayed on the right hand side of the listing output.
2067
2068 @item --listing-cont-lines=@samp{number}
2069 @kindex --listing-cont-lines
2070 @cindex Maximum number of continuation lines
2071 Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex dump that will be
2072 displayed for a given single line of source input. The default value is 4.
2073 @end table
2074
2075 @node M
2076 @section Assemble in MRI Compatibility Mode: @option{-M}
2077
2078 @kindex -M
2079 @cindex MRI compatibility mode
2080 The @option{-M} or @option{--mri} option selects MRI compatibility mode. This
2081 changes the syntax and pseudo-op handling of @command{@value{AS}} to make it
2082 compatible with the @code{ASM68K} or the @code{ASM960} (depending upon the
2083 configured target) assembler from Microtec Research. The exact nature of the
2084 MRI syntax will not be documented here; see the MRI manuals for more
2085 information. Note in particular that the handling of macros and macro
2086 arguments is somewhat different. The purpose of this option is to permit
2087 assembling existing MRI assembler code using @command{@value{AS}}.
2088
2089 The MRI compatibility is not complete. Certain operations of the MRI assembler
2090 depend upon its object file format, and can not be supported using other object
2091 file formats. Supporting these would require enhancing each object file format
2092 individually. These are:
2093
2094 @itemize @bullet
2095 @item global symbols in common section
2096
2097 The m68k MRI assembler supports common sections which are merged by the linker.
2098 Other object file formats do not support this. @command{@value{AS}} handles
2099 common sections by treating them as a single common symbol. It permits local
2100 symbols to be defined within a common section, but it can not support global
2101 symbols, since it has no way to describe them.
2102
2103 @item complex relocations
2104
2105 The MRI assemblers support relocations against a negated section address, and
2106 relocations which combine the start addresses of two or more sections. These
2107 are not support by other object file formats.
2108
2109 @item @code{END} pseudo-op specifying start address
2110
2111 The MRI @code{END} pseudo-op permits the specification of a start address.
2112 This is not supported by other object file formats. The start address may
2113 instead be specified using the @option{-e} option to the linker, or in a linker
2114 script.
2115
2116 @item @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops
2117
2118 The MRI @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops assign a module
2119 name to the output file. This is not supported by other object file formats.
2120
2121 @item @code{ORG} pseudo-op
2122
2123 The m68k MRI @code{ORG} pseudo-op begins an absolute section at a given
2124 address. This differs from the usual @command{@value{AS}} @code{.org} pseudo-op,
2125 which changes the location within the current section. Absolute sections are
2126 not supported by other object file formats. The address of a section may be
2127 assigned within a linker script.
2128 @end itemize
2129
2130 There are some other features of the MRI assembler which are not supported by
2131 @command{@value{AS}}, typically either because they are difficult or because they
2132 seem of little consequence. Some of these may be supported in future releases.
2133
2134 @itemize @bullet
2135
2136 @item EBCDIC strings
2137
2138 EBCDIC strings are not supported.
2139
2140 @item packed binary coded decimal
2141
2142 Packed binary coded decimal is not supported. This means that the @code{DC.P}
2143 and @code{DCB.P} pseudo-ops are not supported.
2144
2145 @item @code{FEQU} pseudo-op
2146
2147 The m68k @code{FEQU} pseudo-op is not supported.
2148
2149 @item @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op
2150
2151 The m68k @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op is not supported.
2152
2153 @item @code{OPT} branch control options
2154
2155 The m68k @code{OPT} branch control options---@code{B}, @code{BRS}, @code{BRB},
2156 @code{BRL}, and @code{BRW}---are ignored. @command{@value{AS}} automatically
2157 relaxes all branches, whether forward or backward, to an appropriate size, so
2158 these options serve no purpose.
2159
2160 @item @code{OPT} list control options
2161
2162 The following m68k @code{OPT} list control options are ignored: @code{C},
2163 @code{CEX}, @code{CL}, @code{CRE}, @code{E}, @code{G}, @code{I}, @code{M},
2164 @code{MEX}, @code{MC}, @code{MD}, @code{X}.
2165
2166 @item other @code{OPT} options
2167
2168 The following m68k @code{OPT} options are ignored: @code{NEST}, @code{O},
2169 @code{OLD}, @code{OP}, @code{P}, @code{PCO}, @code{PCR}, @code{PCS}, @code{R}.
2170
2171 @item @code{OPT} @code{D} option is default
2172
2173 The m68k @code{OPT} @code{D} option is the default, unlike the MRI assembler.
2174 @code{OPT NOD} may be used to turn it off.
2175
2176 @item @code{XREF} pseudo-op.
2177
2178 The m68k @code{XREF} pseudo-op is ignored.
2179
2180 @item @code{.debug} pseudo-op
2181
2182 The i960 @code{.debug} pseudo-op is not supported.
2183
2184 @item @code{.extended} pseudo-op
2185
2186 The i960 @code{.extended} pseudo-op is not supported.
2187
2188 @item @code{.list} pseudo-op.
2189
2190 The various options of the i960 @code{.list} pseudo-op are not supported.
2191
2192 @item @code{.optimize} pseudo-op
2193
2194 The i960 @code{.optimize} pseudo-op is not supported.
2195
2196 @item @code{.output} pseudo-op
2197
2198 The i960 @code{.output} pseudo-op is not supported.
2199
2200 @item @code{.setreal} pseudo-op
2201
2202 The i960 @code{.setreal} pseudo-op is not supported.
2203
2204 @end itemize
2205
2206 @node MD
2207 @section Dependency Tracking: @option{--MD}
2208
2209 @kindex --MD
2210 @cindex dependency tracking
2211 @cindex make rules
2212
2213 @command{@value{AS}} can generate a dependency file for the file it creates. This
2214 file consists of a single rule suitable for @code{make} describing the
2215 dependencies of the main source file.
2216
2217 The rule is written to the file named in its argument.
2218
2219 This feature is used in the automatic updating of makefiles.
2220
2221 @node o
2222 @section Name the Object File: @option{-o}
2223
2224 @kindex -o
2225 @cindex naming object file
2226 @cindex object file name
2227 There is always one object file output when you run @command{@value{AS}}. By
2228 default it has the name
2229 @ifset GENERIC
2230 @ifset I960
2231 @file{a.out} (or @file{b.out}, for Intel 960 targets only).
2232 @end ifset
2233 @ifclear I960
2234 @file{a.out}.
2235 @end ifclear
2236 @end ifset
2237 @ifclear GENERIC
2238 @ifset I960
2239 @file{b.out}.
2240 @end ifset
2241 @ifclear I960
2242 @file{a.out}.
2243 @end ifclear
2244 @end ifclear
2245 You use this option (which takes exactly one filename) to give the
2246 object file a different name.
2247
2248 Whatever the object file is called, @command{@value{AS}} overwrites any
2249 existing file of the same name.
2250
2251 @node R
2252 @section Join Data and Text Sections: @option{-R}
2253
2254 @kindex -R
2255 @cindex data and text sections, joining
2256 @cindex text and data sections, joining
2257 @cindex joining text and data sections
2258 @cindex merging text and data sections
2259 @option{-R} tells @command{@value{AS}} to write the object file as if all
2260 data-section data lives in the text section. This is only done at
2261 the very last moment: your binary data are the same, but data
2262 section parts are relocated differently. The data section part of
2263 your object file is zero bytes long because all its bytes are
2264 appended to the text section. (@xref{Sections,,Sections and Relocation}.)
2265
2266 When you specify @option{-R} it would be possible to generate shorter
2267 address displacements (because we do not have to cross between text and
2268 data section). We refrain from doing this simply for compatibility with
2269 older versions of @command{@value{AS}}. In future, @option{-R} may work this way.
2270
2271 @ifset COFF-ELF
2272 When @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF or ELF output,
2273 this option is only useful if you use sections named @samp{.text} and
2274 @samp{.data}.
2275 @end ifset
2276
2277 @ifset HPPA
2278 @option{-R} is not supported for any of the HPPA targets. Using
2279 @option{-R} generates a warning from @command{@value{AS}}.
2280 @end ifset
2281
2282 @node statistics
2283 @section Display Assembly Statistics: @option{--statistics}
2284
2285 @kindex --statistics
2286 @cindex statistics, about assembly
2287 @cindex time, total for assembly
2288 @cindex space used, maximum for assembly
2289 Use @samp{--statistics} to display two statistics about the resources used by
2290 @command{@value{AS}}: the maximum amount of space allocated during the assembly
2291 (in bytes), and the total execution time taken for the assembly (in @sc{cpu}
2292 seconds).
2293
2294 @node traditional-format
2295 @section Compatible Output: @option{--traditional-format}
2296
2297 @kindex --traditional-format
2298 For some targets, the output of @command{@value{AS}} is different in some ways
2299 from the output of some existing assembler. This switch requests
2300 @command{@value{AS}} to use the traditional format instead.
2301
2302 For example, it disables the exception frame optimizations which
2303 @command{@value{AS}} normally does by default on @code{@value{GCC}} output.
2304
2305 @node v
2306 @section Announce Version: @option{-v}
2307
2308 @kindex -v
2309 @kindex -version
2310 @cindex assembler version
2311 @cindex version of assembler
2312 You can find out what version of as is running by including the
2313 option @samp{-v} (which you can also spell as @samp{-version}) on the
2314 command line.
2315
2316 @node W
2317 @section Control Warnings: @option{-W}, @option{--warn}, @option{--no-warn}, @option{--fatal-warnings}
2318
2319 @command{@value{AS}} should never give a warning or error message when
2320 assembling compiler output. But programs written by people often
2321 cause @command{@value{AS}} to give a warning that a particular assumption was
2322 made. All such warnings are directed to the standard error file.
2323
2324 @kindex -W
2325 @kindex --no-warn
2326 @cindex suppressing warnings
2327 @cindex warnings, suppressing
2328 If you use the @option{-W} and @option{--no-warn} options, no warnings are issued.
2329 This only affects the warning messages: it does not change any particular of
2330 how @command{@value{AS}} assembles your file. Errors, which stop the assembly,
2331 are still reported.
2332
2333 @kindex --fatal-warnings
2334 @cindex errors, caused by warnings
2335 @cindex warnings, causing error
2336 If you use the @option{--fatal-warnings} option, @command{@value{AS}} considers
2337 files that generate warnings to be in error.
2338
2339 @kindex --warn
2340 @cindex warnings, switching on
2341 You can switch these options off again by specifying @option{--warn}, which
2342 causes warnings to be output as usual.
2343
2344 @node Z
2345 @section Generate Object File in Spite of Errors: @option{-Z}
2346 @cindex object file, after errors
2347 @cindex errors, continuing after
2348 After an error message, @command{@value{AS}} normally produces no output. If for
2349 some reason you are interested in object file output even after
2350 @command{@value{AS}} gives an error message on your program, use the @samp{-Z}
2351 option. If there are any errors, @command{@value{AS}} continues anyways, and
2352 writes an object file after a final warning message of the form @samp{@var{n}
2353 errors, @var{m} warnings, generating bad object file.}
2354
2355 @node Syntax
2356 @chapter Syntax
2357
2358 @cindex machine-independent syntax
2359 @cindex syntax, machine-independent
2360 This chapter describes the machine-independent syntax allowed in a
2361 source file. @command{@value{AS}} syntax is similar to what many other
2362 assemblers use; it is inspired by the BSD 4.2
2363 @ifclear VAX
2364 assembler.
2365 @end ifclear
2366 @ifset VAX
2367 assembler, except that @command{@value{AS}} does not assemble Vax bit-fields.
2368 @end ifset
2369
2370 @menu
2371 * Preprocessing:: Preprocessing
2372 * Whitespace:: Whitespace
2373 * Comments:: Comments
2374 * Symbol Intro:: Symbols
2375 * Statements:: Statements
2376 * Constants:: Constants
2377 @end menu
2378
2379 @node Preprocessing
2380 @section Preprocessing
2381
2382 @cindex preprocessing
2383 The @command{@value{AS}} internal preprocessor:
2384 @itemize @bullet
2385 @cindex whitespace, removed by preprocessor
2386 @item
2387 adjusts and removes extra whitespace. It leaves one space or tab before
2388 the keywords on a line, and turns any other whitespace on the line into
2389 a single space.
2390
2391 @cindex comments, removed by preprocessor
2392 @item
2393 removes all comments, replacing them with a single space, or an
2394 appropriate number of newlines.
2395
2396 @cindex constants, converted by preprocessor
2397 @item
2398 converts character constants into the appropriate numeric values.
2399 @end itemize
2400
2401 It does not do macro processing, include file handling, or
2402 anything else you may get from your C compiler's preprocessor. You can
2403 do include file processing with the @code{.include} directive
2404 (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You can use the @sc{gnu} C compiler driver
2405 to get other ``CPP'' style preprocessing by giving the input file a
2406 @samp{.S} suffix. @xref{Overall Options, ,Options Controlling the Kind of
2407 Output, gcc.info, Using GNU CC}.
2408
2409 Excess whitespace, comments, and character constants
2410 cannot be used in the portions of the input text that are not
2411 preprocessed.
2412
2413 @cindex turning preprocessing on and off
2414 @cindex preprocessing, turning on and off
2415 @kindex #NO_APP
2416 @kindex #APP
2417 If the first line of an input file is @code{#NO_APP} or if you use the
2418 @samp{-f} option, whitespace and comments are not removed from the input file.
2419 Within an input file, you can ask for whitespace and comment removal in
2420 specific portions of the by putting a line that says @code{#APP} before the
2421 text that may contain whitespace or comments, and putting a line that says
2422 @code{#NO_APP} after this text. This feature is mainly intend to support
2423 @code{asm} statements in compilers whose output is otherwise free of comments
2424 and whitespace.
2425
2426 @node Whitespace
2427 @section Whitespace
2428
2429 @cindex whitespace
2430 @dfn{Whitespace} is one or more blanks or tabs, in any order.
2431 Whitespace is used to separate symbols, and to make programs neater for
2432 people to read. Unless within character constants
2433 (@pxref{Characters,,Character Constants}), any whitespace means the same
2434 as exactly one space.
2435
2436 @node Comments
2437 @section Comments
2438
2439 @cindex comments
2440 There are two ways of rendering comments to @command{@value{AS}}. In both
2441 cases the comment is equivalent to one space.
2442
2443 Anything from @samp{/*} through the next @samp{*/} is a comment.
2444 This means you may not nest these comments.
2445
2446 @smallexample
2447 /*
2448 The only way to include a newline ('\n') in a comment
2449 is to use this sort of comment.
2450 */
2451
2452 /* This sort of comment does not nest. */
2453 @end smallexample
2454
2455 @cindex line comment character
2456 Anything from a @dfn{line comment} character up to the next newline is
2457 considered a comment and is ignored. The line comment character is target
2458 specific, and some targets multiple comment characters. Some targets also have
2459 line comment characters that only work if they are the first character on a
2460 line. Some targets use a sequence of two characters to introduce a line
2461 comment. Some targets can also change their line comment characters depending
2462 upon command line options that have been used. For more details see the
2463 @emph{Syntax} section in the documentation for individual targets.
2464
2465 If the line comment character is the hash sign (@samp{#}) then it still has the
2466 special ability to enable and disable preprocessing (@pxref{Preprocessing}) and
2467 to specify logical line numbers:
2468
2469 @kindex #
2470 @cindex lines starting with @code{#}
2471 @cindex logical line numbers
2472 To be compatible with past assemblers, lines that begin with @samp{#} have a
2473 special interpretation. Following the @samp{#} should be an absolute
2474 expression (@pxref{Expressions}): the logical line number of the @emph{next}
2475 line. Then a string (@pxref{Strings, ,Strings}) is allowed: if present it is a
2476 new logical file name. The rest of the line, if any, should be whitespace.
2477
2478 If the first non-whitespace characters on the line are not numeric,
2479 the line is ignored. (Just like a comment.)
2480
2481 @smallexample
2482 # This is an ordinary comment.
2483 # 42-6 "new_file_name" # New logical file name
2484 # This is logical line # 36.
2485 @end smallexample
2486 This feature is deprecated, and may disappear from future versions
2487 of @command{@value{AS}}.
2488
2489 @node Symbol Intro
2490 @section Symbols
2491
2492 @cindex characters used in symbols
2493 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
2494 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2495 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2496 @samp{_.$}.
2497 @end ifclear
2498 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
2499 @ifclear GENERIC
2500 @ifset H8
2501 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2502 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2503 @samp{._$}. (Save that, on the H8/300 only, you may not use @samp{$} in
2504 symbol names.)
2505 @end ifset
2506 @end ifclear
2507 @end ifset
2508 @ifset GENERIC
2509 On most machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions
2510 are noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}.
2511 @end ifset
2512 No symbol may begin with a digit. Case is significant.
2513 There is no length limit: all characters are significant. Multibyte characters
2514 are supported. Symbols are delimited by characters not in that set, or by the
2515 beginning of a file (since the source program must end with a newline, the end
2516 of a file is not a possible symbol delimiter). @xref{Symbols}.
2517 @cindex length of symbols
2518
2519 @node Statements
2520 @section Statements
2521
2522 @cindex statements, structure of
2523 @cindex line separator character
2524 @cindex statement separator character
2525
2526 A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}) or a
2527 @dfn{line separator character}. The line separator character is target
2528 specific and described in the @emph{Syntax} section of each
2529 target's documentation. Not all targets support a line separator character.
2530 The newline or line separator character is considered to be part of the
2531 preceding statement. Newlines and separators within character constants are an
2532 exception: they do not end statements.
2533
2534 @cindex newline, required at file end
2535 @cindex EOF, newline must precede
2536 It is an error to end any statement with end-of-file: the last
2537 character of any input file should be a newline.@refill
2538
2539 An empty statement is allowed, and may include whitespace. It is ignored.
2540
2541 @cindex instructions and directives
2542 @cindex directives and instructions
2543 @c "key symbol" is not used elsewhere in the document; seems pedantic to
2544 @c @defn{} it in that case, as was done previously... doc@cygnus.com,
2545 @c 13feb91.
2546 A statement begins with zero or more labels, optionally followed by a
2547 key symbol which determines what kind of statement it is. The key
2548 symbol determines the syntax of the rest of the statement. If the
2549 symbol begins with a dot @samp{.} then the statement is an assembler
2550 directive: typically valid for any computer. If the symbol begins with
2551 a letter the statement is an assembly language @dfn{instruction}: it
2552 assembles into a machine language instruction.
2553 @ifset GENERIC
2554 Different versions of @command{@value{AS}} for different computers
2555 recognize different instructions. In fact, the same symbol may
2556 represent a different instruction in a different computer's assembly
2557 language.@refill
2558 @end ifset
2559
2560 @cindex @code{:} (label)
2561 @cindex label (@code{:})
2562 A label is a symbol immediately followed by a colon (@code{:}).
2563 Whitespace before a label or after a colon is permitted, but you may not
2564 have whitespace between a label's symbol and its colon. @xref{Labels}.
2565
2566 @ifset HPPA
2567 For HPPA targets, labels need not be immediately followed by a colon, but
2568 the definition of a label must begin in column zero. This also implies that
2569 only one label may be defined on each line.
2570 @end ifset
2571
2572 @smallexample
2573 label: .directive followed by something
2574 another_label: # This is an empty statement.
2575 instruction operand_1, operand_2, @dots{}
2576 @end smallexample
2577
2578 @node Constants
2579 @section Constants
2580
2581 @cindex constants
2582 A constant is a number, written so that its value is known by
2583 inspection, without knowing any context. Like this:
2584 @smallexample
2585 @group
2586 .byte 74, 0112, 092, 0x4A, 0X4a, 'J, '\J # All the same value.
2587 .ascii "Ring the bell\7" # A string constant.
2588 .octa 0x123456789abcdef0123456789ABCDEF0 # A bignum.
2589 .float 0f-314159265358979323846264338327\
2590 95028841971.693993751E-40 # - pi, a flonum.
2591 @end group
2592 @end smallexample
2593
2594 @menu
2595 * Characters:: Character Constants
2596 * Numbers:: Number Constants
2597 @end menu
2598
2599 @node Characters
2600 @subsection Character Constants
2601
2602 @cindex character constants
2603 @cindex constants, character
2604 There are two kinds of character constants. A @dfn{character} stands
2605 for one character in one byte and its value may be used in
2606 numeric expressions. String constants (properly called string
2607 @emph{literals}) are potentially many bytes and their values may not be
2608 used in arithmetic expressions.
2609
2610 @menu
2611 * Strings:: Strings
2612 * Chars:: Characters
2613 @end menu
2614
2615 @node Strings
2616 @subsubsection Strings
2617
2618 @cindex string constants
2619 @cindex constants, string
2620 A @dfn{string} is written between double-quotes. It may contain
2621 double-quotes or null characters. The way to get special characters
2622 into a string is to @dfn{escape} these characters: precede them with
2623 a backslash @samp{\} character. For example @samp{\\} represents
2624 one backslash: the first @code{\} is an escape which tells
2625 @command{@value{AS}} to interpret the second character literally as a backslash
2626 (which prevents @command{@value{AS}} from recognizing the second @code{\} as an
2627 escape character). The complete list of escapes follows.
2628
2629 @cindex escape codes, character
2630 @cindex character escape codes
2631 @table @kbd
2632 @c @item \a
2633 @c Mnemonic for ACKnowledge; for ASCII this is octal code 007.
2634 @c
2635 @cindex @code{\b} (backspace character)
2636 @cindex backspace (@code{\b})
2637 @item \b
2638 Mnemonic for backspace; for ASCII this is octal code 010.
2639
2640 @c @item \e
2641 @c Mnemonic for EOText; for ASCII this is octal code 004.
2642 @c
2643 @cindex @code{\f} (formfeed character)
2644 @cindex formfeed (@code{\f})
2645 @item \f
2646 Mnemonic for FormFeed; for ASCII this is octal code 014.
2647
2648 @cindex @code{\n} (newline character)
2649 @cindex newline (@code{\n})
2650 @item \n
2651 Mnemonic for newline; for ASCII this is octal code 012.
2652
2653 @c @item \p
2654 @c Mnemonic for prefix; for ASCII this is octal code 033, usually known as @code{escape}.
2655 @c
2656 @cindex @code{\r} (carriage return character)
2657 @cindex carriage return (@code{\r})
2658 @item \r
2659 Mnemonic for carriage-Return; for ASCII this is octal code 015.
2660
2661 @c @item \s
2662 @c Mnemonic for space; for ASCII this is octal code 040. Included for compliance with
2663 @c other assemblers.
2664 @c
2665 @cindex @code{\t} (tab)
2666 @cindex tab (@code{\t})
2667 @item \t
2668 Mnemonic for horizontal Tab; for ASCII this is octal code 011.
2669
2670 @c @item \v
2671 @c Mnemonic for Vertical tab; for ASCII this is octal code 013.
2672 @c @item \x @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2673 @c A hexadecimal character code. The numeric code is 3 hexadecimal digits.
2674 @c
2675 @cindex @code{\@var{ddd}} (octal character code)
2676 @cindex octal character code (@code{\@var{ddd}})
2677 @item \ @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2678 An octal character code. The numeric code is 3 octal digits.
2679 For compatibility with other Unix systems, 8 and 9 are accepted as digits:
2680 for example, @code{\008} has the value 010, and @code{\009} the value 011.
2681
2682 @cindex @code{\@var{xd...}} (hex character code)
2683 @cindex hex character code (@code{\@var{xd...}})
2684 @item \@code{x} @var{hex-digits...}
2685 A hex character code. All trailing hex digits are combined. Either upper or
2686 lower case @code{x} works.
2687
2688 @cindex @code{\\} (@samp{\} character)
2689 @cindex backslash (@code{\\})
2690 @item \\
2691 Represents one @samp{\} character.
2692
2693 @c @item \'
2694 @c Represents one @samp{'} (accent acute) character.
2695 @c This is needed in single character literals
2696 @c (@xref{Characters,,Character Constants}.) to represent
2697 @c a @samp{'}.
2698 @c
2699 @cindex @code{\"} (doublequote character)
2700 @cindex doublequote (@code{\"})
2701 @item \"
2702 Represents one @samp{"} character. Needed in strings to represent
2703 this character, because an unescaped @samp{"} would end the string.
2704
2705 @item \ @var{anything-else}
2706 Any other character when escaped by @kbd{\} gives a warning, but
2707 assembles as if the @samp{\} was not present. The idea is that if
2708 you used an escape sequence you clearly didn't want the literal
2709 interpretation of the following character. However @command{@value{AS}} has no
2710 other interpretation, so @command{@value{AS}} knows it is giving you the wrong
2711 code and warns you of the fact.
2712 @end table
2713
2714 Which characters are escapable, and what those escapes represent,
2715 varies widely among assemblers. The current set is what we think
2716 the BSD 4.2 assembler recognizes, and is a subset of what most C
2717 compilers recognize. If you are in doubt, do not use an escape
2718 sequence.
2719
2720 @node Chars
2721 @subsubsection Characters
2722
2723 @cindex single character constant
2724 @cindex character, single
2725 @cindex constant, single character
2726 A single character may be written as a single quote immediately
2727 followed by that character. The same escapes apply to characters as
2728 to strings. So if you want to write the character backslash, you
2729 must write @kbd{'\\} where the first @code{\} escapes the second
2730 @code{\}. As you can see, the quote is an acute accent, not a
2731 grave accent. A newline
2732 @ifclear GENERIC
2733 @ifclear abnormal-separator
2734 (or semicolon @samp{;})
2735 @end ifclear
2736 @ifset abnormal-separator
2737 @ifset H8
2738 (or dollar sign @samp{$}, for the H8/300; or semicolon @samp{;} for the
2739 Renesas SH)
2740 @end ifset
2741 @end ifset
2742 @end ifclear
2743 immediately following an acute accent is taken as a literal character
2744 and does not count as the end of a statement. The value of a character
2745 constant in a numeric expression is the machine's byte-wide code for
2746 that character. @command{@value{AS}} assumes your character code is ASCII:
2747 @kbd{'A} means 65, @kbd{'B} means 66, and so on. @refill
2748
2749 @node Numbers
2750 @subsection Number Constants
2751
2752 @cindex constants, number
2753 @cindex number constants
2754 @command{@value{AS}} distinguishes three kinds of numbers according to how they
2755 are stored in the target machine. @emph{Integers} are numbers that
2756 would fit into an @code{int} in the C language. @emph{Bignums} are
2757 integers, but they are stored in more than 32 bits. @emph{Flonums}
2758 are floating point numbers, described below.
2759
2760 @menu
2761 * Integers:: Integers
2762 * Bignums:: Bignums
2763 * Flonums:: Flonums
2764 @ifclear GENERIC
2765 @ifset I960
2766 * Bit Fields:: Bit Fields
2767 @end ifset
2768 @end ifclear
2769 @end menu
2770
2771 @node Integers
2772 @subsubsection Integers
2773 @cindex integers
2774 @cindex constants, integer
2775
2776 @cindex binary integers
2777 @cindex integers, binary
2778 A binary integer is @samp{0b} or @samp{0B} followed by zero or more of
2779 the binary digits @samp{01}.
2780
2781 @cindex octal integers
2782 @cindex integers, octal
2783 An octal integer is @samp{0} followed by zero or more of the octal
2784 digits (@samp{01234567}).
2785
2786 @cindex decimal integers
2787 @cindex integers, decimal
2788 A decimal integer starts with a non-zero digit followed by zero or
2789 more digits (@samp{0123456789}).
2790
2791 @cindex hexadecimal integers
2792 @cindex integers, hexadecimal
2793 A hexadecimal integer is @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} followed by one or
2794 more hexadecimal digits chosen from @samp{0123456789abcdefABCDEF}.
2795
2796 Integers have the usual values. To denote a negative integer, use
2797 the prefix operator @samp{-} discussed under expressions
2798 (@pxref{Prefix Ops,,Prefix Operators}).
2799
2800 @node Bignums
2801 @subsubsection Bignums
2802
2803 @cindex bignums
2804 @cindex constants, bignum
2805 A @dfn{bignum} has the same syntax and semantics as an integer
2806 except that the number (or its negative) takes more than 32 bits to
2807 represent in binary. The distinction is made because in some places
2808 integers are permitted while bignums are not.
2809
2810 @node Flonums
2811 @subsubsection Flonums
2812 @cindex flonums
2813 @cindex floating point numbers
2814 @cindex constants, floating point
2815
2816 @cindex precision, floating point
2817 A @dfn{flonum} represents a floating point number. The translation is
2818 indirect: a decimal floating point number from the text is converted by
2819 @command{@value{AS}} to a generic binary floating point number of more than
2820 sufficient precision. This generic floating point number is converted
2821 to a particular computer's floating point format (or formats) by a
2822 portion of @command{@value{AS}} specialized to that computer.
2823
2824 A flonum is written by writing (in order)
2825 @itemize @bullet
2826 @item
2827 The digit @samp{0}.
2828 @ifset HPPA
2829 (@samp{0} is optional on the HPPA.)
2830 @end ifset
2831
2832 @item
2833 A letter, to tell @command{@value{AS}} the rest of the number is a flonum.
2834 @ifset GENERIC
2835 @kbd{e} is recommended. Case is not important.
2836 @ignore
2837 @c FIXME: verify if flonum syntax really this vague for most cases
2838 (Any otherwise illegal letter works here, but that might be changed. Vax BSD
2839 4.2 assembler seems to allow any of @samp{defghDEFGH}.)
2840 @end ignore
2841
2842 On the H8/300, Renesas / SuperH SH,
2843 and AMD 29K architectures, the letter must be
2844 one of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
2845
2846 On the ARC, the letter must be one of the letters @samp{DFRS}
2847 (in upper or lower case).
2848
2849 On the Intel 960 architecture, the letter must be
2850 one of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
2851
2852 On the HPPA architecture, the letter must be @samp{E} (upper case only).
2853 @end ifset
2854 @ifclear GENERIC
2855 @ifset ARC
2856 One of the letters @samp{DFRS} (in upper or lower case).
2857 @end ifset
2858 @ifset H8
2859 One of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
2860 @end ifset
2861 @ifset HPPA
2862 The letter @samp{E} (upper case only).
2863 @end ifset
2864 @ifset I960
2865 One of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
2866 @end ifset
2867 @end ifclear
2868
2869 @item
2870 An optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
2871
2872 @item
2873 An optional @dfn{integer part}: zero or more decimal digits.
2874
2875 @item
2876 An optional @dfn{fractional part}: @samp{.} followed by zero
2877 or more decimal digits.
2878
2879 @item
2880 An optional exponent, consisting of:
2881
2882 @itemize @bullet
2883 @item
2884 An @samp{E} or @samp{e}.
2885 @c I can't find a config where "EXP_CHARS" is other than 'eE', but in
2886 @c principle this can perfectly well be different on different targets.
2887 @item
2888 Optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
2889 @item
2890 One or more decimal digits.
2891 @end itemize
2892
2893 @end itemize
2894
2895 At least one of the integer part or the fractional part must be
2896 present. The floating point number has the usual base-10 value.
2897
2898 @command{@value{AS}} does all processing using integers. Flonums are computed
2899 independently of any floating point hardware in the computer running
2900 @command{@value{AS}}.
2901
2902 @ifclear GENERIC
2903 @ifset I960
2904 @c Bit fields are written as a general facility but are also controlled
2905 @c by a conditional-compilation flag---which is as of now (21mar91)
2906 @c turned on only by the i960 config of GAS.
2907 @node Bit Fields
2908 @subsubsection Bit Fields
2909
2910 @cindex bit fields
2911 @cindex constants, bit field
2912 You can also define numeric constants as @dfn{bit fields}.
2913 Specify two numbers separated by a colon---
2914 @example
2915 @var{mask}:@var{value}
2916 @end example
2917 @noindent
2918 @command{@value{AS}} applies a bitwise @sc{and} between @var{mask} and
2919 @var{value}.
2920
2921 The resulting number is then packed
2922 @ifset GENERIC
2923 @c this conditional paren in case bit fields turned on elsewhere than 960
2924 (in host-dependent byte order)
2925 @end ifset
2926 into a field whose width depends on which assembler directive has the
2927 bit-field as its argument. Overflow (a result from the bitwise and
2928 requiring more binary digits to represent) is not an error; instead,
2929 more constants are generated, of the specified width, beginning with the
2930 least significant digits.@refill
2931
2932 The directives @code{.byte}, @code{.hword}, @code{.int}, @code{.long},
2933 @code{.short}, and @code{.word} accept bit-field arguments.
2934 @end ifset
2935 @end ifclear
2936
2937 @node Sections
2938 @chapter Sections and Relocation
2939 @cindex sections
2940 @cindex relocation
2941
2942 @menu
2943 * Secs Background:: Background
2944 * Ld Sections:: Linker Sections
2945 * As Sections:: Assembler Internal Sections
2946 * Sub-Sections:: Sub-Sections
2947 * bss:: bss Section
2948 @end menu
2949
2950 @node Secs Background
2951 @section Background
2952
2953 Roughly, a section is a range of addresses, with no gaps; all data
2954 ``in'' those addresses is treated the same for some particular purpose.
2955 For example there may be a ``read only'' section.
2956
2957 @cindex linker, and assembler
2958 @cindex assembler, and linker
2959 The linker @code{@value{LD}} reads many object files (partial programs) and
2960 combines their contents to form a runnable program. When @command{@value{AS}}
2961 emits an object file, the partial program is assumed to start at address 0.
2962 @code{@value{LD}} assigns the final addresses for the partial program, so that
2963 different partial programs do not overlap. This is actually an
2964 oversimplification, but it suffices to explain how @command{@value{AS}} uses
2965 sections.
2966
2967 @code{@value{LD}} moves blocks of bytes of your program to their run-time
2968 addresses. These blocks slide to their run-time addresses as rigid
2969 units; their length does not change and neither does the order of bytes
2970 within them. Such a rigid unit is called a @emph{section}. Assigning
2971 run-time addresses to sections is called @dfn{relocation}. It includes
2972 the task of adjusting mentions of object-file addresses so they refer to
2973 the proper run-time addresses.
2974 @ifset H8
2975 For the H8/300, and for the Renesas / SuperH SH,
2976 @command{@value{AS}} pads sections if needed to
2977 ensure they end on a word (sixteen bit) boundary.
2978 @end ifset
2979
2980 @cindex standard assembler sections
2981 An object file written by @command{@value{AS}} has at least three sections, any
2982 of which may be empty. These are named @dfn{text}, @dfn{data} and
2983 @dfn{bss} sections.
2984
2985 @ifset COFF-ELF
2986 @ifset GENERIC
2987 When it generates COFF or ELF output,
2988 @end ifset
2989 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you specify
2990 using the @samp{.section} directive (@pxref{Section,,@code{.section}}).
2991 If you do not use any directives that place output in the @samp{.text}
2992 or @samp{.data} sections, these sections still exist, but are empty.
2993 @end ifset
2994
2995 @ifset HPPA
2996 @ifset GENERIC
2997 When @command{@value{AS}} generates SOM or ELF output for the HPPA,
2998 @end ifset
2999 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you
3000 specify using the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace} directives. See
3001 @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly Language Reference Manual}
3002 (HP 92432-90001) for details on the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace}
3003 assembler directives.
3004
3005 @ifset SOM
3006 Additionally, @command{@value{AS}} uses different names for the standard
3007 text, data, and bss sections when generating SOM output. Program text
3008 is placed into the @samp{$CODE$} section, data into @samp{$DATA$}, and
3009 BSS into @samp{$BSS$}.
3010 @end ifset
3011 @end ifset
3012
3013 Within the object file, the text section starts at address @code{0}, the
3014 data section follows, and the bss section follows the data section.
3015
3016 @ifset HPPA
3017 When generating either SOM or ELF output files on the HPPA, the text
3018 section starts at address @code{0}, the data section at address
3019 @code{0x4000000}, and the bss section follows the data section.
3020 @end ifset
3021
3022 To let @code{@value{LD}} know which data changes when the sections are
3023 relocated, and how to change that data, @command{@value{AS}} also writes to the
3024 object file details of the relocation needed. To perform relocation
3025 @code{@value{LD}} must know, each time an address in the object
3026 file is mentioned:
3027 @itemize @bullet
3028 @item
3029 Where in the object file is the beginning of this reference to
3030 an address?
3031 @item
3032 How long (in bytes) is this reference?
3033 @item
3034 Which section does the address refer to? What is the numeric value of
3035 @display
3036 (@var{address}) @minus{} (@var{start-address of section})?
3037 @end display
3038 @item
3039 Is the reference to an address ``Program-Counter relative''?
3040 @end itemize
3041
3042 @cindex addresses, format of
3043 @cindex section-relative addressing
3044 In fact, every address @command{@value{AS}} ever uses is expressed as
3045 @display
3046 (@var{section}) + (@var{offset into section})
3047 @end display
3048 @noindent
3049 Further, most expressions @command{@value{AS}} computes have this section-relative
3050 nature.
3051 @ifset SOM
3052 (For some object formats, such as SOM for the HPPA, some expressions are
3053 symbol-relative instead.)
3054 @end ifset
3055
3056 In this manual we use the notation @{@var{secname} @var{N}@} to mean ``offset
3057 @var{N} into section @var{secname}.''
3058
3059 Apart from text, data and bss sections you need to know about the
3060 @dfn{absolute} section. When @code{@value{LD}} mixes partial programs,
3061 addresses in the absolute section remain unchanged. For example, address
3062 @code{@{absolute 0@}} is ``relocated'' to run-time address 0 by
3063 @code{@value{LD}}. Although the linker never arranges two partial programs'
3064 data sections with overlapping addresses after linking, @emph{by definition}
3065 their absolute sections must overlap. Address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in one
3066 part of a program is always the same address when the program is running as
3067 address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in any other part of the program.
3068
3069 The idea of sections is extended to the @dfn{undefined} section. Any
3070 address whose section is unknown at assembly time is by definition
3071 rendered @{undefined @var{U}@}---where @var{U} is filled in later.
3072 Since numbers are always defined, the only way to generate an undefined
3073 address is to mention an undefined symbol. A reference to a named
3074 common block would be such a symbol: its value is unknown at assembly
3075 time so it has section @emph{undefined}.
3076
3077 By analogy the word @emph{section} is used to describe groups of sections in
3078 the linked program. @code{@value{LD}} puts all partial programs' text
3079 sections in contiguous addresses in the linked program. It is
3080 customary to refer to the @emph{text section} of a program, meaning all
3081 the addresses of all partial programs' text sections. Likewise for
3082 data and bss sections.
3083
3084 Some sections are manipulated by @code{@value{LD}}; others are invented for
3085 use of @command{@value{AS}} and have no meaning except during assembly.
3086
3087 @node Ld Sections
3088 @section Linker Sections
3089 @code{@value{LD}} deals with just four kinds of sections, summarized below.
3090
3091 @table @strong
3092
3093 @ifset COFF-ELF
3094 @cindex named sections
3095 @cindex sections, named
3096 @item named sections
3097 @end ifset
3098 @ifset aout-bout
3099 @cindex text section
3100 @cindex data section
3101 @itemx text section
3102 @itemx data section
3103 @end ifset
3104 These sections hold your program. @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} treat them as
3105 separate but equal sections. Anything you can say of one section is
3106 true of another.
3107 @c @ifset aout-bout
3108 When the program is running, however, it is
3109 customary for the text section to be unalterable. The
3110 text section is often shared among processes: it contains
3111 instructions, constants and the like. The data section of a running
3112 program is usually alterable: for example, C variables would be stored
3113 in the data section.
3114 @c @end ifset
3115
3116 @cindex bss section
3117 @item bss section
3118 This section contains zeroed bytes when your program begins running. It
3119 is used to hold uninitialized variables or common storage. The length of
3120 each partial program's bss section is important, but because it starts
3121 out containing zeroed bytes there is no need to store explicit zero
3122 bytes in the object file. The bss section was invented to eliminate
3123 those explicit zeros from object files.
3124
3125 @cindex absolute section
3126 @item absolute section
3127 Address 0 of this section is always ``relocated'' to runtime address 0.
3128 This is useful if you want to refer to an address that @code{@value{LD}} must
3129 not change when relocating. In this sense we speak of absolute
3130 addresses being ``unrelocatable'': they do not change during relocation.
3131
3132 @cindex undefined section
3133 @item undefined section
3134 This ``section'' is a catch-all for address references to objects not in
3135 the preceding sections.
3136 @c FIXME: ref to some other doc on obj-file formats could go here.
3137 @end table
3138
3139 @cindex relocation example
3140 An idealized example of three relocatable sections follows.
3141 @ifset COFF-ELF
3142 The example uses the traditional section names @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}.
3143 @end ifset
3144 Memory addresses are on the horizontal axis.
3145
3146 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3147 @ifnottex
3148 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3149 @smallexample
3150 +-----+----+--+
3151 partial program # 1: |ttttt|dddd|00|
3152 +-----+----+--+
3153
3154 text data bss
3155 seg. seg. seg.
3156
3157 +---+---+---+
3158 partial program # 2: |TTT|DDD|000|
3159 +---+---+---+
3160
3161 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3162 linked program: | |TTT|ttttt| |dddd|DDD|00000|
3163 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3164
3165 addresses: 0 @dots{}
3166 @end smallexample
3167 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3168 @end ifnottex
3169 @need 5000
3170 @tex
3171 \bigskip
3172 \line{\it Partial program \#1: \hfil}
3173 \line{\ibox{2.5cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3174 \line{\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt ttttt}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 00}\hfil}
3175
3176 \line{\it Partial program \#2: \hfil}
3177 \line{\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{1.5cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3178 \line{\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt DDDD}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 000}\hfil}
3179
3180 \line{\it linked program: \hfil}
3181 \line{\ibox{.5cm}{}\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2.5cm}{}\ibox{.75cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1.5cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3182 \line{\boxit{.5cm}{}\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt
3183 ttttt}\boxit{.75cm}{}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt
3184 DDDD}\boxit{2cm}{\tt 00000}\ \dots\hfil}
3185
3186 \line{\it addresses: \hfil}
3187 \line{0\dots\hfil}
3188
3189 @end tex
3190 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3191
3192 @node As Sections
3193 @section Assembler Internal Sections
3194
3195 @cindex internal assembler sections
3196 @cindex sections in messages, internal
3197 These sections are meant only for the internal use of @command{@value{AS}}. They
3198 have no meaning at run-time. You do not really need to know about these
3199 sections for most purposes; but they can be mentioned in @command{@value{AS}}
3200 warning messages, so it might be helpful to have an idea of their
3201 meanings to @command{@value{AS}}. These sections are used to permit the
3202 value of every expression in your assembly language program to be a
3203 section-relative address.
3204
3205 @table @b
3206 @cindex assembler internal logic error
3207 @item ASSEMBLER-INTERNAL-LOGIC-ERROR!
3208 An internal assembler logic error has been found. This means there is a
3209 bug in the assembler.
3210
3211 @cindex expr (internal section)
3212 @item expr section
3213 The assembler stores complex expression internally as combinations of
3214 symbols. When it needs to represent an expression as a symbol, it puts
3215 it in the expr section.
3216 @c FIXME item debug
3217 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector preload
3218 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector postload
3219 @c FIXME item register
3220 @end table
3221
3222 @node Sub-Sections
3223 @section Sub-Sections
3224
3225 @cindex numbered subsections
3226 @cindex grouping data
3227 @ifset aout-bout
3228 Assembled bytes
3229 @ifset COFF-ELF
3230 conventionally
3231 @end ifset
3232 fall into two sections: text and data.
3233 @end ifset
3234 You may have separate groups of
3235 @ifset GENERIC
3236 data in named sections
3237 @end ifset
3238 @ifclear GENERIC
3239 @ifclear aout-bout
3240 data in named sections
3241 @end ifclear
3242 @ifset aout-bout
3243 text or data
3244 @end ifset
3245 @end ifclear
3246 that you want to end up near to each other in the object file, even though they
3247 are not contiguous in the assembler source. @command{@value{AS}} allows you to
3248 use @dfn{subsections} for this purpose. Within each section, there can be
3249 numbered subsections with values from 0 to 8192. Objects assembled into the
3250 same subsection go into the object file together with other objects in the same
3251 subsection. For example, a compiler might want to store constants in the text
3252 section, but might not want to have them interspersed with the program being
3253 assembled. In this case, the compiler could issue a @samp{.text 0} before each
3254 section of code being output, and a @samp{.text 1} before each group of
3255 constants being output.
3256
3257 Subsections are optional. If you do not use subsections, everything
3258 goes in subsection number zero.
3259
3260 @ifset GENERIC
3261 Each subsection is zero-padded up to a multiple of four bytes.
3262 (Subsections may be padded a different amount on different flavors
3263 of @command{@value{AS}}.)
3264 @end ifset
3265 @ifclear GENERIC
3266 @ifset H8
3267 On the H8/300 platform, each subsection is zero-padded to a word
3268 boundary (two bytes).
3269 The same is true on the Renesas SH.
3270 @end ifset
3271 @ifset I960
3272 @c FIXME section padding (alignment)?
3273 @c Rich Pixley says padding here depends on target obj code format; that
3274 @c doesn't seem particularly useful to say without further elaboration,
3275 @c so for now I say nothing about it. If this is a generic BFD issue,
3276 @c these paragraphs might need to vanish from this manual, and be
3277 @c discussed in BFD chapter of binutils (or some such).
3278 @end ifset
3279 @end ifclear
3280
3281 Subsections appear in your object file in numeric order, lowest numbered
3282 to highest. (All this to be compatible with other people's assemblers.)
3283 The object file contains no representation of subsections; @code{@value{LD}} and
3284 other programs that manipulate object files see no trace of them.
3285 They just see all your text subsections as a text section, and all your
3286 data subsections as a data section.
3287
3288 To specify which subsection you want subsequent statements assembled
3289 into, use a numeric argument to specify it, in a @samp{.text
3290 @var{expression}} or a @samp{.data @var{expression}} statement.
3291 @ifset COFF
3292 @ifset GENERIC
3293 When generating COFF output, you
3294 @end ifset
3295 @ifclear GENERIC
3296 You
3297 @end ifclear
3298 can also use an extra subsection
3299 argument with arbitrary named sections: @samp{.section @var{name},
3300 @var{expression}}.
3301 @end ifset
3302 @ifset ELF
3303 @ifset GENERIC
3304 When generating ELF output, you
3305 @end ifset
3306 @ifclear GENERIC
3307 You
3308 @end ifclear
3309 can also use the @code{.subsection} directive (@pxref{SubSection})
3310 to specify a subsection: @samp{.subsection @var{expression}}.
3311 @end ifset
3312 @var{Expression} should be an absolute expression
3313 (@pxref{Expressions}). If you just say @samp{.text} then @samp{.text 0}
3314 is assumed. Likewise @samp{.data} means @samp{.data 0}. Assembly
3315 begins in @code{text 0}. For instance:
3316 @smallexample
3317 .text 0 # The default subsection is text 0 anyway.
3318 .ascii "This lives in the first text subsection. *"
3319 .text 1
3320 .ascii "But this lives in the second text subsection."
3321 .data 0
3322 .ascii "This lives in the data section,"
3323 .ascii "in the first data subsection."
3324 .text 0
3325 .ascii "This lives in the first text section,"
3326 .ascii "immediately following the asterisk (*)."
3327 @end smallexample
3328
3329 Each section has a @dfn{location counter} incremented by one for every byte
3330 assembled into that section. Because subsections are merely a convenience
3331 restricted to @command{@value{AS}} there is no concept of a subsection location
3332 counter. There is no way to directly manipulate a location counter---but the
3333 @code{.align} directive changes it, and any label definition captures its
3334 current value. The location counter of the section where statements are being
3335 assembled is said to be the @dfn{active} location counter.
3336
3337 @node bss
3338 @section bss Section
3339
3340 @cindex bss section
3341 @cindex common variable storage
3342 The bss section is used for local common variable storage.
3343 You may allocate address space in the bss section, but you may
3344 not dictate data to load into it before your program executes. When
3345 your program starts running, all the contents of the bss
3346 section are zeroed bytes.
3347
3348 The @code{.lcomm} pseudo-op defines a symbol in the bss section; see
3349 @ref{Lcomm,,@code{.lcomm}}.
3350
3351 The @code{.comm} pseudo-op may be used to declare a common symbol, which is
3352 another form of uninitialized symbol; see @ref{Comm,,@code{.comm}}.
3353
3354 @ifset GENERIC
3355 When assembling for a target which supports multiple sections, such as ELF or
3356 COFF, you may switch into the @code{.bss} section and define symbols as usual;
3357 see @ref{Section,,@code{.section}}. You may only assemble zero values into the
3358 section. Typically the section will only contain symbol definitions and
3359 @code{.skip} directives (@pxref{Skip,,@code{.skip}}).
3360 @end ifset
3361
3362 @node Symbols
3363 @chapter Symbols
3364
3365 @cindex symbols
3366 Symbols are a central concept: the programmer uses symbols to name
3367 things, the linker uses symbols to link, and the debugger uses symbols
3368 to debug.
3369
3370 @quotation
3371 @cindex debuggers, and symbol order
3372 @emph{Warning:} @command{@value{AS}} does not place symbols in the object file in
3373 the same order they were declared. This may break some debuggers.
3374 @end quotation
3375
3376 @menu
3377 * Labels:: Labels
3378 * Setting Symbols:: Giving Symbols Other Values
3379 * Symbol Names:: Symbol Names
3380 * Dot:: The Special Dot Symbol
3381 * Symbol Attributes:: Symbol Attributes
3382 @end menu
3383
3384 @node Labels
3385 @section Labels
3386
3387 @cindex labels
3388 A @dfn{label} is written as a symbol immediately followed by a colon
3389 @samp{:}. The symbol then represents the current value of the
3390 active location counter, and is, for example, a suitable instruction
3391 operand. You are warned if you use the same symbol to represent two
3392 different locations: the first definition overrides any other
3393 definitions.
3394
3395 @ifset HPPA
3396 On the HPPA, the usual form for a label need not be immediately followed by a
3397 colon, but instead must start in column zero. Only one label may be defined on
3398 a single line. To work around this, the HPPA version of @command{@value{AS}} also
3399 provides a special directive @code{.label} for defining labels more flexibly.
3400 @end ifset
3401
3402 @node Setting Symbols
3403 @section Giving Symbols Other Values
3404
3405 @cindex assigning values to symbols
3406 @cindex symbol values, assigning
3407 A symbol can be given an arbitrary value by writing a symbol, followed
3408 by an equals sign @samp{=}, followed by an expression
3409 (@pxref{Expressions}). This is equivalent to using the @code{.set}
3410 directive. @xref{Set,,@code{.set}}. In the same way, using a double
3411 equals sign @samp{=}@samp{=} here represents an equivalent of the
3412 @code{.eqv} directive. @xref{Eqv,,@code{.eqv}}.
3413
3414 @ifset Blackfin
3415 Blackfin does not support symbol assignment with @samp{=}.
3416 @end ifset
3417
3418 @node Symbol Names
3419 @section Symbol Names
3420
3421 @cindex symbol names
3422 @cindex names, symbol
3423 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
3424 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On most
3425 machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions are
3426 noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}. That character may be followed by any
3427 string of digits, letters, dollar signs (unless otherwise noted for a
3428 particular target machine), and underscores.
3429 @end ifclear
3430 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
3431 @ifset H8
3432 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On the
3433 Renesas SH you can also use @code{$} in symbol names. That
3434 character may be followed by any string of digits, letters, dollar signs (save
3435 on the H8/300), and underscores.
3436 @end ifset
3437 @end ifset
3438
3439 Case of letters is significant: @code{foo} is a different symbol name
3440 than @code{Foo}.
3441
3442 Multibyte characters are supported. To generate a symbol name containing
3443 multibyte characters enclose it within double quotes and use escape codes. cf
3444 @xref{Strings}. Generating a multibyte symbol name from a label is not
3445 currently supported.
3446
3447 Each symbol has exactly one name. Each name in an assembly language program
3448 refers to exactly one symbol. You may use that symbol name any number of times
3449 in a program.
3450
3451 @subheading Local Symbol Names
3452
3453 @cindex local symbol names
3454 @cindex symbol names, local
3455 A local symbol is any symbol beginning with certain local label prefixes.
3456 By default, the local label prefix is @samp{.L} for ELF systems or
3457 @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, but each target may have its own
3458 set of local label prefixes.
3459 @ifset HPPA
3460 On the HPPA local symbols begin with @samp{L$}.
3461 @end ifset
3462
3463 Local symbols are defined and used within the assembler, but they are
3464 normally not saved in object files. Thus, they are not visible when debugging.
3465 You may use the @samp{-L} option (@pxref{L, ,Include Local Symbols:
3466 @option{-L}}) to retain the local symbols in the object files.
3467
3468 @subheading Local Labels
3469
3470 @cindex local labels
3471 @cindex temporary symbol names
3472 @cindex symbol names, temporary
3473 Local labels help compilers and programmers use names temporarily.
3474 They create symbols which are guaranteed to be unique over the entire scope of
3475 the input source code and which can be referred to by a simple notation.
3476 To define a local label, write a label of the form @samp{@b{N}:} (where @b{N}
3477 represents any positive integer). To refer to the most recent previous
3478 definition of that label write @samp{@b{N}b}, using the same number as when
3479 you defined the label. To refer to the next definition of a local label, write
3480 @samp{@b{N}f}---the @samp{b} stands for ``backwards'' and the @samp{f} stands
3481 for ``forwards''.
3482
3483 There is no restriction on how you can use these labels, and you can reuse them
3484 too. So that it is possible to repeatedly define the same local label (using
3485 the same number @samp{@b{N}}), although you can only refer to the most recently
3486 defined local label of that number (for a backwards reference) or the next
3487 definition of a specific local label for a forward reference. It is also worth
3488 noting that the first 10 local labels (@samp{@b{0:}}@dots{}@samp{@b{9:}}) are
3489 implemented in a slightly more efficient manner than the others.
3490
3491 Here is an example:
3492
3493 @smallexample
3494 1: branch 1f
3495 2: branch 1b
3496 1: branch 2f
3497 2: branch 1b
3498 @end smallexample
3499
3500 Which is the equivalent of:
3501
3502 @smallexample
3503 label_1: branch label_3
3504 label_2: branch label_1
3505 label_3: branch label_4
3506 label_4: branch label_3
3507 @end smallexample
3508
3509 Local label names are only a notational device. They are immediately
3510 transformed into more conventional symbol names before the assembler uses them.
3511 The symbol names are stored in the symbol table, appear in error messages, and
3512 are optionally emitted to the object file. The names are constructed using
3513 these parts:
3514
3515 @table @code
3516 @item @emph{local label prefix}
3517 All local symbols begin with the system-specific local label prefix.
3518 Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} forget symbols
3519 that start with the local label prefix. These labels are
3520 used for symbols you are never intended to see. If you use the
3521 @samp{-L} option then @command{@value{AS}} retains these symbols in the
3522 object file. If you also instruct @code{@value{LD}} to retain these symbols,
3523 you may use them in debugging.
3524
3525 @item @var{number}
3526 This is the number that was used in the local label definition. So if the
3527 label is written @samp{55:} then the number is @samp{55}.
3528
3529 @item @kbd{C-B}
3530 This unusual character is included so you do not accidentally invent a symbol
3531 of the same name. The character has ASCII value of @samp{\002} (control-B).
3532
3533 @item @emph{ordinal number}
3534 This is a serial number to keep the labels distinct. The first definition of
3535 @samp{0:} gets the number @samp{1}. The 15th definition of @samp{0:} gets the
3536 number @samp{15}, and so on. Likewise the first definition of @samp{1:} gets
3537 the number @samp{1} and its 15th definition gets @samp{15} as well.
3538 @end table
3539
3540 So for example, the first @code{1:} may be named @code{.L1@kbd{C-B}1}, and
3541 the 44th @code{3:} may be named @code{.L3@kbd{C-B}44}.
3542
3543 @subheading Dollar Local Labels
3544 @cindex dollar local symbols
3545
3546 @code{@value{AS}} also supports an even more local form of local labels called
3547 dollar labels. These labels go out of scope (i.e., they become undefined) as
3548 soon as a non-local label is defined. Thus they remain valid for only a small
3549 region of the input source code. Normal local labels, by contrast, remain in
3550 scope for the entire file, or until they are redefined by another occurrence of
3551 the same local label.
3552
3553 Dollar labels are defined in exactly the same way as ordinary local labels,
3554 except that they have a dollar sign suffix to their numeric value, e.g.,
3555 @samp{@b{55$:}}.
3556
3557 They can also be distinguished from ordinary local labels by their transformed
3558 names which use ASCII character @samp{\001} (control-A) as the magic character
3559 to distinguish them from ordinary labels. For example, the fifth definition of
3560 @samp{6$} may be named @samp{.L6@kbd{C-A}5}.
3561
3562 @node Dot
3563 @section The Special Dot Symbol
3564
3565 @cindex dot (symbol)
3566 @cindex @code{.} (symbol)
3567 @cindex current address
3568 @cindex location counter
3569 The special symbol @samp{.} refers to the current address that
3570 @command{@value{AS}} is assembling into. Thus, the expression @samp{melvin:
3571 .long .} defines @code{melvin} to contain its own address.
3572 Assigning a value to @code{.} is treated the same as a @code{.org}
3573 directive.
3574 @ifclear no-space-dir
3575 Thus, the expression @samp{.=.+4} is the same as saying
3576 @samp{.space 4}.
3577 @end ifclear
3578
3579 @node Symbol Attributes
3580 @section Symbol Attributes
3581
3582 @cindex symbol attributes
3583 @cindex attributes, symbol
3584 Every symbol has, as well as its name, the attributes ``Value'' and
3585 ``Type''. Depending on output format, symbols can also have auxiliary
3586 attributes.
3587 @ifset INTERNALS
3588 The detailed definitions are in @file{a.out.h}.
3589 @end ifset
3590
3591 If you use a symbol without defining it, @command{@value{AS}} assumes zero for
3592 all these attributes, and probably won't warn you. This makes the
3593 symbol an externally defined symbol, which is generally what you
3594 would want.
3595
3596 @menu
3597 * Symbol Value:: Value
3598 * Symbol Type:: Type
3599 @ifset aout-bout
3600 @ifset GENERIC
3601 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3602 @end ifset
3603 @ifclear GENERIC
3604 @ifclear BOUT
3605 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3606 @end ifclear
3607 @ifset BOUT
3608 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3609 @end ifset
3610 @end ifclear
3611 @end ifset
3612 @ifset COFF
3613 * COFF Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for COFF
3614 @end ifset
3615 @ifset SOM
3616 * SOM Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for SOM
3617 @end ifset
3618 @end menu
3619
3620 @node Symbol Value
3621 @subsection Value
3622
3623 @cindex value of a symbol
3624 @cindex symbol value
3625 The value of a symbol is (usually) 32 bits. For a symbol which labels a
3626 location in the text, data, bss or absolute sections the value is the
3627 number of addresses from the start of that section to the label.
3628 Naturally for text, data and bss sections the value of a symbol changes
3629 as @code{@value{LD}} changes section base addresses during linking. Absolute
3630 symbols' values do not change during linking: that is why they are
3631 called absolute.
3632
3633 The value of an undefined symbol is treated in a special way. If it is
3634 0 then the symbol is not defined in this assembler source file, and
3635 @code{@value{LD}} tries to determine its value from other files linked into the
3636 same program. You make this kind of symbol simply by mentioning a symbol
3637 name without defining it. A non-zero value represents a @code{.comm}
3638 common declaration. The value is how much common storage to reserve, in
3639 bytes (addresses). The symbol refers to the first address of the
3640 allocated storage.
3641
3642 @node Symbol Type
3643 @subsection Type
3644
3645 @cindex type of a symbol
3646 @cindex symbol type
3647 The type attribute of a symbol contains relocation (section)
3648 information, any flag settings indicating that a symbol is external, and
3649 (optionally), other information for linkers and debuggers. The exact
3650 format depends on the object-code output format in use.
3651
3652 @ifset aout-bout
3653 @ifclear GENERIC
3654 @ifset BOUT
3655 @c The following avoids a "widow" subsection title. @group would be
3656 @c better if it were available outside examples.
3657 @need 1000
3658 @node a.out Symbols
3659 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3660
3661 @cindex @code{b.out} symbol attributes
3662 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{b.out}
3663 These symbol attributes appear only when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for
3664 one of the Berkeley-descended object output formats---@code{a.out} or
3665 @code{b.out}.
3666
3667 @end ifset
3668 @ifclear BOUT
3669 @node a.out Symbols
3670 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3671
3672 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3673 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3674
3675 @end ifclear
3676 @end ifclear
3677 @ifset GENERIC
3678 @node a.out Symbols
3679 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3680
3681 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3682 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3683
3684 @end ifset
3685 @menu
3686 * Symbol Desc:: Descriptor
3687 * Symbol Other:: Other
3688 @end menu
3689
3690 @node Symbol Desc
3691 @subsubsection Descriptor
3692
3693 @cindex descriptor, of @code{a.out} symbol
3694 This is an arbitrary 16-bit value. You may establish a symbol's
3695 descriptor value by using a @code{.desc} statement
3696 (@pxref{Desc,,@code{.desc}}). A descriptor value means nothing to
3697 @command{@value{AS}}.
3698
3699 @node Symbol Other
3700 @subsubsection Other
3701
3702 @cindex other attribute, of @code{a.out} symbol
3703 This is an arbitrary 8-bit value. It means nothing to @command{@value{AS}}.
3704 @end ifset
3705
3706 @ifset COFF
3707 @node COFF Symbols
3708 @subsection Symbol Attributes for COFF
3709
3710 @cindex COFF symbol attributes
3711 @cindex symbol attributes, COFF
3712
3713 The COFF format supports a multitude of auxiliary symbol attributes;
3714 like the primary symbol attributes, they are set between @code{.def} and
3715 @code{.endef} directives.
3716
3717 @subsubsection Primary Attributes
3718
3719 @cindex primary attributes, COFF symbols
3720 The symbol name is set with @code{.def}; the value and type,
3721 respectively, with @code{.val} and @code{.type}.
3722
3723 @subsubsection Auxiliary Attributes
3724
3725 @cindex auxiliary attributes, COFF symbols
3726 The @command{@value{AS}} directives @code{.dim}, @code{.line}, @code{.scl},
3727 @code{.size}, @code{.tag}, and @code{.weak} can generate auxiliary symbol
3728 table information for COFF.
3729 @end ifset
3730
3731 @ifset SOM
3732 @node SOM Symbols
3733 @subsection Symbol Attributes for SOM
3734
3735 @cindex SOM symbol attributes
3736 @cindex symbol attributes, SOM
3737
3738 The SOM format for the HPPA supports a multitude of symbol attributes set with
3739 the @code{.EXPORT} and @code{.IMPORT} directives.
3740
3741 The attributes are described in @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly
3742 Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) under the @code{IMPORT} and
3743 @code{EXPORT} assembler directive documentation.
3744 @end ifset
3745
3746 @node Expressions
3747 @chapter Expressions
3748
3749 @cindex expressions
3750 @cindex addresses
3751 @cindex numeric values
3752 An @dfn{expression} specifies an address or numeric value.
3753 Whitespace may precede and/or follow an expression.
3754
3755 The result of an expression must be an absolute number, or else an offset into
3756 a particular section. If an expression is not absolute, and there is not
3757 enough information when @command{@value{AS}} sees the expression to know its
3758 section, a second pass over the source program might be necessary to interpret
3759 the expression---but the second pass is currently not implemented.
3760 @command{@value{AS}} aborts with an error message in this situation.
3761
3762 @menu
3763 * Empty Exprs:: Empty Expressions
3764 * Integer Exprs:: Integer Expressions
3765 @end menu
3766
3767 @node Empty Exprs
3768 @section Empty Expressions
3769
3770 @cindex empty expressions
3771 @cindex expressions, empty
3772 An empty expression has no value: it is just whitespace or null.
3773 Wherever an absolute expression is required, you may omit the
3774 expression, and @command{@value{AS}} assumes a value of (absolute) 0. This
3775 is compatible with other assemblers.
3776
3777 @node Integer Exprs
3778 @section Integer Expressions
3779
3780 @cindex integer expressions
3781 @cindex expressions, integer
3782 An @dfn{integer expression} is one or more @emph{arguments} delimited
3783 by @emph{operators}.
3784
3785 @menu
3786 * Arguments:: Arguments
3787 * Operators:: Operators
3788 * Prefix Ops:: Prefix Operators
3789 * Infix Ops:: Infix Operators
3790 @end menu
3791
3792 @node Arguments
3793 @subsection Arguments
3794
3795 @cindex expression arguments
3796 @cindex arguments in expressions
3797 @cindex operands in expressions
3798 @cindex arithmetic operands
3799 @dfn{Arguments} are symbols, numbers or subexpressions. In other
3800 contexts arguments are sometimes called ``arithmetic operands''. In
3801 this manual, to avoid confusing them with the ``instruction operands'' of
3802 the machine language, we use the term ``argument'' to refer to parts of
3803 expressions only, reserving the word ``operand'' to refer only to machine
3804 instruction operands.
3805
3806 Symbols are evaluated to yield @{@var{section} @var{NNN}@} where
3807 @var{section} is one of text, data, bss, absolute,
3808 or undefined. @var{NNN} is a signed, 2's complement 32 bit
3809 integer.
3810
3811 Numbers are usually integers.
3812
3813 A number can be a flonum or bignum. In this case, you are warned
3814 that only the low order 32 bits are used, and @command{@value{AS}} pretends
3815 these 32 bits are an integer. You may write integer-manipulating
3816 instructions that act on exotic constants, compatible with other
3817 assemblers.
3818
3819 @cindex subexpressions
3820 Subexpressions are a left parenthesis @samp{(} followed by an integer
3821 expression, followed by a right parenthesis @samp{)}; or a prefix
3822 operator followed by an argument.
3823
3824 @node Operators
3825 @subsection Operators
3826
3827 @cindex operators, in expressions
3828 @cindex arithmetic functions
3829 @cindex functions, in expressions
3830 @dfn{Operators} are arithmetic functions, like @code{+} or @code{%}. Prefix
3831 operators are followed by an argument. Infix operators appear
3832 between their arguments. Operators may be preceded and/or followed by
3833 whitespace.
3834
3835 @node Prefix Ops
3836 @subsection Prefix Operator
3837
3838 @cindex prefix operators
3839 @command{@value{AS}} has the following @dfn{prefix operators}. They each take
3840 one argument, which must be absolute.
3841
3842 @c the tex/end tex stuff surrounding this small table is meant to make
3843 @c it align, on the printed page, with the similar table in the next
3844 @c section (which is inside an enumerate).
3845 @tex
3846 \global\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
3847 @end tex
3848
3849 @table @code
3850 @item -
3851 @dfn{Negation}. Two's complement negation.
3852 @item ~
3853 @dfn{Complementation}. Bitwise not.
3854 @end table
3855
3856 @tex
3857 \global\advance\leftskip by -\itemindent
3858 @end tex
3859
3860 @node Infix Ops
3861 @subsection Infix Operators
3862
3863 @cindex infix operators
3864 @cindex operators, permitted arguments
3865 @dfn{Infix operators} take two arguments, one on either side. Operators
3866 have precedence, but operations with equal precedence are performed left
3867 to right. Apart from @code{+} or @option{-}, both arguments must be
3868 absolute, and the result is absolute.
3869
3870 @enumerate
3871 @cindex operator precedence
3872 @cindex precedence of operators
3873
3874 @item
3875 Highest Precedence
3876
3877 @table @code
3878 @item *
3879 @dfn{Multiplication}.
3880
3881 @item /
3882 @dfn{Division}. Truncation is the same as the C operator @samp{/}
3883
3884 @item %
3885 @dfn{Remainder}.
3886
3887 @item <<
3888 @dfn{Shift Left}. Same as the C operator @samp{<<}.
3889
3890 @item >>
3891 @dfn{Shift Right}. Same as the C operator @samp{>>}.
3892 @end table
3893
3894 @item
3895 Intermediate precedence
3896
3897 @table @code
3898 @item |
3899
3900 @dfn{Bitwise Inclusive Or}.
3901
3902 @item &
3903 @dfn{Bitwise And}.
3904
3905 @item ^
3906 @dfn{Bitwise Exclusive Or}.
3907
3908 @item !
3909 @dfn{Bitwise Or Not}.
3910 @end table
3911
3912 @item
3913 Low Precedence
3914
3915 @table @code
3916 @cindex addition, permitted arguments
3917 @cindex plus, permitted arguments
3918 @cindex arguments for addition
3919 @item +
3920 @dfn{Addition}. If either argument is absolute, the result has the section of
3921 the other argument. You may not add together arguments from different
3922 sections.
3923
3924 @cindex subtraction, permitted arguments
3925 @cindex minus, permitted arguments
3926 @cindex arguments for subtraction
3927 @item -
3928 @dfn{Subtraction}. If the right argument is absolute, the
3929 result has the section of the left argument.
3930 If both arguments are in the same section, the result is absolute.
3931 You may not subtract arguments from different sections.
3932 @c FIXME is there still something useful to say about undefined - undefined ?
3933
3934 @cindex comparison expressions
3935 @cindex expressions, comparison
3936 @item ==
3937 @dfn{Is Equal To}
3938 @item <>
3939 @itemx !=
3940 @dfn{Is Not Equal To}
3941 @item <
3942 @dfn{Is Less Than}
3943 @item >
3944 @dfn{Is Greater Than}
3945 @item >=
3946 @dfn{Is Greater Than Or Equal To}
3947 @item <=
3948 @dfn{Is Less Than Or Equal To}
3949
3950 The comparison operators can be used as infix operators. A true results has a
3951 value of -1 whereas a false result has a value of 0. Note, these operators
3952 perform signed comparisons.
3953 @end table
3954
3955 @item Lowest Precedence
3956
3957 @table @code
3958 @item &&
3959 @dfn{Logical And}.
3960
3961 @item ||
3962 @dfn{Logical Or}.
3963
3964 These two logical operations can be used to combine the results of sub
3965 expressions. Note, unlike the comparison operators a true result returns a
3966 value of 1 but a false results does still return 0. Also note that the logical
3967 or operator has a slightly lower precedence than logical and.
3968
3969 @end table
3970 @end enumerate
3971
3972 In short, it's only meaningful to add or subtract the @emph{offsets} in an
3973 address; you can only have a defined section in one of the two arguments.
3974
3975 @node Pseudo Ops
3976 @chapter Assembler Directives
3977
3978 @cindex directives, machine independent
3979 @cindex pseudo-ops, machine independent
3980 @cindex machine independent directives
3981 All assembler directives have names that begin with a period (@samp{.}).
3982 The rest of the name is letters, usually in lower case.
3983
3984 This chapter discusses directives that are available regardless of the
3985 target machine configuration for the @sc{gnu} assembler.
3986 @ifset GENERIC
3987 Some machine configurations provide additional directives.
3988 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
3989 @end ifset
3990 @ifclear GENERIC
3991 @ifset machine-directives
3992 @xref{Machine Dependencies}, for additional directives.
3993 @end ifset
3994 @end ifclear
3995
3996 @menu
3997 * Abort:: @code{.abort}
3998 @ifset COFF
3999 * ABORT (COFF):: @code{.ABORT}
4000 @end ifset
4001
4002 * Align:: @code{.align @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4003 * Altmacro:: @code{.altmacro}
4004 * Ascii:: @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4005 * Asciz:: @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4006 * Balign:: @code{.balign @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4007 * Bundle directives:: @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}, @code{.bundle_lock}, @code{.bundle_unlock}
4008 * Byte:: @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4009 * CFI directives:: @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}, @code{.cfi_endproc}, etc.
4010 * Comm:: @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4011 * Data:: @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4012 @ifset COFF
4013 * Def:: @code{.def @var{name}}
4014 @end ifset
4015 @ifset aout-bout
4016 * Desc:: @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4017 @end ifset
4018 @ifset COFF
4019 * Dim:: @code{.dim}
4020 @end ifset
4021
4022 * Double:: @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4023 * Eject:: @code{.eject}
4024 * Else:: @code{.else}
4025 * Elseif:: @code{.elseif}
4026 * End:: @code{.end}
4027 @ifset COFF
4028 * Endef:: @code{.endef}
4029 @end ifset
4030
4031 * Endfunc:: @code{.endfunc}
4032 * Endif:: @code{.endif}
4033 * Equ:: @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4034 * Equiv:: @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4035 * Eqv:: @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4036 * Err:: @code{.err}
4037 * Error:: @code{.error @var{string}}
4038 * Exitm:: @code{.exitm}
4039 * Extern:: @code{.extern}
4040 * Fail:: @code{.fail}
4041 * File:: @code{.file}
4042 * Fill:: @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4043 * Float:: @code{.float @var{flonums}}
4044 * Func:: @code{.func}
4045 * Global:: @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
4046 @ifset ELF
4047 * Gnu_attribute:: @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
4048 * Hidden:: @code{.hidden @var{names}}
4049 @end ifset
4050
4051 * hword:: @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
4052 * Ident:: @code{.ident}
4053 * If:: @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
4054 * Incbin:: @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
4055 * Include:: @code{.include "@var{file}"}
4056 * Int:: @code{.int @var{expressions}}
4057 @ifset ELF
4058 * Internal:: @code{.internal @var{names}}
4059 @end ifset
4060
4061 * Irp:: @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4062 * Irpc:: @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4063 * Lcomm:: @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
4064 * Lflags:: @code{.lflags}
4065 @ifclear no-line-dir
4066 * Line:: @code{.line @var{line-number}}
4067 @end ifclear
4068
4069 * Linkonce:: @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
4070 * List:: @code{.list}
4071 * Ln:: @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
4072 * Loc:: @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno}}
4073 * Loc_mark_labels:: @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
4074 @ifset ELF
4075 * Local:: @code{.local @var{names}}
4076 @end ifset
4077
4078 * Long:: @code{.long @var{expressions}}
4079 @ignore
4080 * Lsym:: @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4081 @end ignore
4082
4083 * Macro:: @code{.macro @var{name} @var{args}}@dots{}
4084 * MRI:: @code{.mri @var{val}}
4085 * Noaltmacro:: @code{.noaltmacro}
4086 * Nolist:: @code{.nolist}
4087 * Octa:: @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
4088 * Offset:: @code{.offset @var{loc}}
4089 * Org:: @code{.org @var{new-lc}, @var{fill}}
4090 * P2align:: @code{.p2align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4091 @ifset ELF
4092 * PopSection:: @code{.popsection}
4093 * Previous:: @code{.previous}
4094 @end ifset
4095
4096 * Print:: @code{.print @var{string}}
4097 @ifset ELF
4098 * Protected:: @code{.protected @var{names}}
4099 @end ifset
4100
4101 * Psize:: @code{.psize @var{lines}, @var{columns}}
4102 * Purgem:: @code{.purgem @var{name}}
4103 @ifset ELF
4104 * PushSection:: @code{.pushsection @var{name}}
4105 @end ifset
4106
4107 * Quad:: @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
4108 * Reloc:: @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
4109 * Rept:: @code{.rept @var{count}}
4110 * Sbttl:: @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
4111 @ifset COFF
4112 * Scl:: @code{.scl @var{class}}
4113 @end ifset
4114 @ifset COFF-ELF
4115 * Section:: @code{.section @var{name}[, @var{flags}]}
4116 @end ifset
4117
4118 * Set:: @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4119 * Short:: @code{.short @var{expressions}}
4120 * Single:: @code{.single @var{flonums}}
4121 @ifset COFF-ELF
4122 * Size:: @code{.size [@var{name} , @var{expression}]}
4123 @end ifset
4124 @ifclear no-space-dir
4125 * Skip:: @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4126 @end ifclear
4127
4128 * Sleb128:: @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
4129 @ifclear no-space-dir
4130 * Space:: @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4131 @end ifclear
4132 @ifset have-stabs
4133 * Stab:: @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
4134 @end ifset
4135
4136 * String:: @code{.string "@var{str}"}, @code{.string8 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string16 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string32 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string64 "@var{str}"}
4137 * Struct:: @code{.struct @var{expression}}
4138 @ifset ELF
4139 * SubSection:: @code{.subsection}
4140 * Symver:: @code{.symver @var{name},@var{name2@@nodename}}
4141 @end ifset
4142
4143 @ifset COFF
4144 * Tag:: @code{.tag @var{structname}}
4145 @end ifset
4146
4147 * Text:: @code{.text @var{subsection}}
4148 * Title:: @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
4149 @ifset COFF-ELF
4150 * Type:: @code{.type <@var{int} | @var{name} , @var{type description}>}
4151 @end ifset
4152
4153 * Uleb128:: @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
4154 @ifset COFF
4155 * Val:: @code{.val @var{addr}}
4156 @end ifset
4157
4158 @ifset ELF
4159 * Version:: @code{.version "@var{string}"}
4160 * VTableEntry:: @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
4161 * VTableInherit:: @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
4162 @end ifset
4163
4164 * Warning:: @code{.warning @var{string}}
4165 * Weak:: @code{.weak @var{names}}
4166 * Weakref:: @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{symbol}}
4167 * Word:: @code{.word @var{expressions}}
4168 * Deprecated:: Deprecated Directives
4169 @end menu
4170
4171 @node Abort
4172 @section @code{.abort}
4173
4174 @cindex @code{abort} directive
4175 @cindex stopping the assembly
4176 This directive stops the assembly immediately. It is for
4177 compatibility with other assemblers. The original idea was that the
4178 assembly language source would be piped into the assembler. If the sender
4179 of the source quit, it could use this directive tells @command{@value{AS}} to
4180 quit also. One day @code{.abort} will not be supported.
4181
4182 @ifset COFF
4183 @node ABORT (COFF)
4184 @section @code{.ABORT} (COFF)
4185
4186 @cindex @code{ABORT} directive
4187 When producing COFF output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive as a
4188 synonym for @samp{.abort}.
4189
4190 @ifset BOUT
4191 When producing @code{b.out} output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive,
4192 but ignores it.
4193 @end ifset
4194 @end ifset
4195
4196 @node Align
4197 @section @code{.align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4198
4199 @cindex padding the location counter
4200 @cindex @code{align} directive
4201 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular storage
4202 boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the alignment
4203 required, as described below.
4204
4205 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4206 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4207 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4208 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4209 with no-op instructions.
4210
4211 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4212 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4213 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4214 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4215 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4216 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4217 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4218
4219 The way the required alignment is specified varies from system to system.
4220 For the arc, hppa, i386 using ELF, i860, iq2000, m68k, or32,
4221 s390, sparc, tic4x, tic80 and xtensa, the first expression is the
4222 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.align 8} advances
4223 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4224 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed. For the tic54x, the
4225 first expression is the alignment request in words.
4226
4227 For other systems, including ppc, i386 using a.out format, arm and
4228 strongarm, it is the
4229 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
4230 advancement. For example @samp{.align 3} advances the location
4231 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
4232 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4233
4234 This inconsistency is due to the different behaviors of the various
4235 native assemblers for these systems which GAS must emulate.
4236 GAS also provides @code{.balign} and @code{.p2align} directives,
4237 described later, which have a consistent behavior across all
4238 architectures (but are specific to GAS).
4239
4240 @node Altmacro
4241 @section @code{.altmacro}
4242 Enable alternate macro mode, enabling:
4243
4244 @ftable @code
4245 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
4246 One additional directive, @code{LOCAL}, is available. It is used to
4247 generate a string replacement for each of the @var{name} arguments, and
4248 replace any instances of @var{name} in each macro expansion. The
4249 replacement string is unique in the assembly, and different for each
4250 separate macro expansion. @code{LOCAL} allows you to write macros that
4251 define symbols, without fear of conflict between separate macro expansions.
4252
4253 @item String delimiters
4254 You can write strings delimited in these other ways besides
4255 @code{"@var{string}"}:
4256
4257 @table @code
4258 @item '@var{string}'
4259 You can delimit strings with single-quote characters.
4260
4261 @item <@var{string}>
4262 You can delimit strings with matching angle brackets.
4263 @end table
4264
4265 @item single-character string escape
4266 To include any single character literally in a string (even if the
4267 character would otherwise have some special meaning), you can prefix the
4268 character with @samp{!} (an exclamation mark). For example, you can
4269 write @samp{<4.3 !> 5.4!!>} to get the literal text @samp{4.3 > 5.4!}.
4270
4271 @item Expression results as strings
4272 You can write @samp{%@var{expr}} to evaluate the expression @var{expr}
4273 and use the result as a string.
4274 @end ftable
4275
4276 @node Ascii
4277 @section @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4278
4279 @cindex @code{ascii} directive
4280 @cindex string literals
4281 @code{.ascii} expects zero or more string literals (@pxref{Strings})
4282 separated by commas. It assembles each string (with no automatic
4283 trailing zero byte) into consecutive addresses.
4284
4285 @node Asciz
4286 @section @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4287
4288 @cindex @code{asciz} directive
4289 @cindex zero-terminated strings
4290 @cindex null-terminated strings
4291 @code{.asciz} is just like @code{.ascii}, but each string is followed by
4292 a zero byte. The ``z'' in @samp{.asciz} stands for ``zero''.
4293
4294 @node Balign
4295 @section @code{.balign[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4296
4297 @cindex padding the location counter given number of bytes
4298 @cindex @code{balign} directive
4299 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
4300 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
4301 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.balign 8} advances
4302 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4303 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4304
4305 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4306 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4307 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4308 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4309 with no-op instructions.
4310
4311 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4312 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4313 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4314 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4315 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4316 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4317 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4318
4319 @cindex @code{balignw} directive
4320 @cindex @code{balignl} directive
4321 The @code{.balignw} and @code{.balignl} directives are variants of the
4322 @code{.balign} directive. The @code{.balignw} directive treats the fill
4323 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.balignl} directives treats the
4324 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.balignw
4325 4,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
4326 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
4327 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
4328 undefined.
4329
4330 @node Bundle directives
4331 @section @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}
4332 @cindex @code{bundle_align_mode} directive
4333 @cindex bundle
4334 @cindex instruction bundle
4335 @cindex aligned instruction bundle
4336 @code{.bundle_align_mode} enables or disables @dfn{aligned instruction
4337 bundle} mode. In this mode, sequences of adjacent instructions are grouped
4338 into fixed-sized @dfn{bundles}. If the argument is zero, this mode is
4339 disabled (which is the default state). If the argument it not zero, it
4340 gives the size of an instruction bundle as a power of two (as for the
4341 @code{.p2align} directive, @pxref{P2align}).
4342
4343 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that no instruction may span a
4344 certain aligned boundary. A @dfn{bundle} is simply a sequence of
4345 instructions that starts on an aligned boundary. For example, if
4346 @var{abs-expr} is @code{5} then the bundle size is 32, so each aligned
4347 chunk of 32 bytes is a bundle. When aligned instruction bundle mode is in
4348 effect, no single instruction may span a boundary between bundles. If an
4349 instruction would start too close to the end of a bundle for the length of
4350 that particular instruction to fit within the bundle, then the space at the
4351 end of that bundle is filled with no-op instructions so the instruction
4352 starts in the next bundle. As a corollary, it's an error if any single
4353 instruction's encoding is longer than the bundle size.
4354
4355 @section @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4356 @cindex @code{bundle_lock} directive
4357 @cindex @code{bundle_unlock} directive
4358 The @code{.bundle_lock} and directive @code{.bundle_unlock} directives
4359 allow explicit control over instruction bundle padding. These directives
4360 are only valid when @code{.bundle_align_mode} has been used to enable
4361 aligned instruction bundle mode. It's an error if they appear when
4362 @code{.bundle_align_mode} has not been used at all, or when the last
4363 directive was @w{@code{.bundle_align_mode 0}}.
4364
4365 @cindex bundle-locked
4366 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that certain instructions may
4367 appear only as part of specified permissible sequences of multiple
4368 instructions, all within the same bundle. A pair of @code{.bundle_lock}
4369 and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives define a @dfn{bundle-locked}
4370 instruction sequence. For purposes of aligned instruction bundle mode, a
4371 sequence starting with @code{.bundle_lock} and ending with
4372 @code{.bundle_unlock} is treated as a single instruction. That is, the
4373 entire sequence must fit into a single bundle and may not span a bundle
4374 boundary. If necessary, no-op instructions will be inserted before the
4375 first instruction of the sequence so that the whole sequence starts on an
4376 aligned bundle boundary. It's an error if the sequence is longer than the
4377 bundle size.
4378
4379 For convenience when using @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4380 inside assembler macros (@pxref{Macro}), bundle-locked sequences may be
4381 nested. That is, a second @code{.bundle_lock} directive before the next
4382 @code{.bundle_unlock} directive has no effect except that it must be
4383 matched by another closing @code{.bundle_unlock} so that there is the
4384 same number of @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives.
4385
4386 @node Byte
4387 @section @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4388
4389 @cindex @code{byte} directive
4390 @cindex integers, one byte
4391 @code{.byte} expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas.
4392 Each expression is assembled into the next byte.
4393
4394 @node CFI directives
4395 @section @code{.cfi_sections @var{section_list}}
4396 @cindex @code{cfi_sections} directive
4397 @code{.cfi_sections} may be used to specify whether CFI directives
4398 should emit @code{.eh_frame} section and/or @code{.debug_frame} section.
4399 If @var{section_list} is @code{.eh_frame}, @code{.eh_frame} is emitted,
4400 if @var{section_list} is @code{.debug_frame}, @code{.debug_frame} is emitted.
4401 To emit both use @code{.eh_frame, .debug_frame}. The default if this
4402 directive is not used is @code{.cfi_sections .eh_frame}.
4403
4404 @section @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}
4405 @cindex @code{cfi_startproc} directive
4406 @code{.cfi_startproc} is used at the beginning of each function that
4407 should have an entry in @code{.eh_frame}. It initializes some internal
4408 data structures. Don't forget to close the function by
4409 @code{.cfi_endproc}.
4410
4411 Unless @code{.cfi_startproc} is used along with parameter @code{simple}
4412 it also emits some architecture dependent initial CFI instructions.
4413
4414 @section @code{.cfi_endproc}
4415 @cindex @code{cfi_endproc} directive
4416 @code{.cfi_endproc} is used at the end of a function where it closes its
4417 unwind entry previously opened by
4418 @code{.cfi_startproc}, and emits it to @code{.eh_frame}.
4419
4420 @section @code{.cfi_personality @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4421 @code{.cfi_personality} defines personality routine and its encoding.
4422 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the personality
4423 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4424 argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be
4425 a constant or a symbol name. When using indirect encodings,
4426 the symbol provided should be the location where personality
4427 can be loaded from, not the personality routine itself.
4428 The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_personality 0xff},
4429 no personality routine.
4430
4431 @section @code{.cfi_lsda @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4432 @code{.cfi_lsda} defines LSDA and its encoding.
4433 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the LSDA
4434 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4435 argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be a constant
4436 or a symbol name. The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_lsda 0xff},
4437 no LSDA.
4438
4439 @section @code{.cfi_def_cfa @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4440 @code{.cfi_def_cfa} defines a rule for computing CFA as: @i{take
4441 address from @var{register} and add @var{offset} to it}.
4442
4443 @section @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register @var{register}}
4444 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register} modifies a rule for computing CFA. From
4445 now on @var{register} will be used instead of the old one. Offset
4446 remains the same.
4447
4448 @section @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4449 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} modifies a rule for computing CFA. Register
4450 remains the same, but @var{offset} is new. Note that it is the
4451 absolute offset that will be added to a defined register to compute
4452 CFA address.
4453
4454 @section @code{.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4455 Same as @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} but @var{offset} is a relative
4456 value that is added/substracted from the previous offset.
4457
4458 @section @code{.cfi_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4459 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4460 CFA.
4461
4462 @section @code{.cfi_rel_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4463 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4464 the current CFA register. This is transformed to @code{.cfi_offset}
4465 using the known displacement of the CFA register from the CFA.
4466 This is often easier to use, because the number will match the
4467 code it's annotating.
4468
4469 @section @code{.cfi_register @var{register1}, @var{register2}}
4470 Previous value of @var{register1} is saved in register @var{register2}.
4471
4472 @section @code{.cfi_restore @var{register}}
4473 @code{.cfi_restore} says that the rule for @var{register} is now the
4474 same as it was at the beginning of the function, after all initial
4475 instruction added by @code{.cfi_startproc} were executed.
4476
4477 @section @code{.cfi_undefined @var{register}}
4478 From now on the previous value of @var{register} can't be restored anymore.
4479
4480 @section @code{.cfi_same_value @var{register}}
4481 Current value of @var{register} is the same like in the previous frame,
4482 i.e. no restoration needed.
4483
4484 @section @code{.cfi_remember_state},
4485 First save all current rules for all registers by @code{.cfi_remember_state},
4486 then totally screw them up by subsequent @code{.cfi_*} directives and when
4487 everything is hopelessly bad, use @code{.cfi_restore_state} to restore
4488 the previous saved state.
4489
4490 @section @code{.cfi_return_column @var{register}}
4491 Change return column @var{register}, i.e. the return address is either
4492 directly in @var{register} or can be accessed by rules for @var{register}.
4493
4494 @section @code{.cfi_signal_frame}
4495 Mark current function as signal trampoline.
4496
4497 @section @code{.cfi_window_save}
4498 SPARC register window has been saved.
4499
4500 @section @code{.cfi_escape} @var{expression}[, @dots{}]
4501 Allows the user to add arbitrary bytes to the unwind info. One
4502 might use this to add OS-specific CFI opcodes, or generic CFI
4503 opcodes that GAS does not yet support.
4504
4505 @section @code{.cfi_val_encoded_addr @var{register}, @var{encoding}, @var{label}}
4506 The current value of @var{register} is @var{label}. The value of @var{label}
4507 will be encoded in the output file according to @var{encoding}; see the
4508 description of @code{.cfi_personality} for details on this encoding.
4509
4510 The usefulness of equating a register to a fixed label is probably
4511 limited to the return address register. Here, it can be useful to
4512 mark a code segment that has only one return address which is reached
4513 by a direct branch and no copy of the return address exists in memory
4514 or another register.
4515
4516 @node Comm
4517 @section @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4518
4519 @cindex @code{comm} directive
4520 @cindex symbol, common
4521 @code{.comm} declares a common symbol named @var{symbol}. When linking, a
4522 common symbol in one object file may be merged with a defined or common symbol
4523 of the same name in another object file. If @code{@value{LD}} does not see a
4524 definition for the symbol--just one or more common symbols--then it will
4525 allocate @var{length} bytes of uninitialized memory. @var{length} must be an
4526 absolute expression. If @code{@value{LD}} sees multiple common symbols with
4527 the same name, and they do not all have the same size, it will allocate space
4528 using the largest size.
4529
4530 @ifset COFF-ELF
4531 When using ELF or (as a GNU extension) PE, the @code{.comm} directive takes
4532 an optional third argument. This is the desired alignment of the symbol,
4533 specified for ELF as a byte boundary (for example, an alignment of 16 means
4534 that the least significant 4 bits of the address should be zero), and for PE
4535 as a power of two (for example, an alignment of 5 means aligned to a 32-byte
4536 boundary). The alignment must be an absolute expression, and it must be a
4537 power of two. If @code{@value{LD}} allocates uninitialized memory for the
4538 common symbol, it will use the alignment when placing the symbol. If no
4539 alignment is specified, @command{@value{AS}} will set the alignment to the
4540 largest power of two less than or equal to the size of the symbol, up to a
4541 maximum of 16 on ELF, or the default section alignment of 4 on PE@footnote{This
4542 is not the same as the executable image file alignment controlled by @code{@value{LD}}'s
4543 @samp{--section-alignment} option; image file sections in PE are aligned to
4544 multiples of 4096, which is far too large an alignment for ordinary variables.
4545 It is rather the default alignment for (non-debug) sections within object
4546 (@samp{*.o}) files, which are less strictly aligned.}.
4547 @end ifset
4548
4549 @ifset HPPA
4550 The syntax for @code{.comm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
4551 @samp{@var{symbol} .comm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
4552 @end ifset
4553
4554 @node Data
4555 @section @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4556
4557 @cindex @code{data} directive
4558 @code{.data} tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the
4559 end of the data subsection numbered @var{subsection} (which is an
4560 absolute expression). If @var{subsection} is omitted, it defaults
4561 to zero.
4562
4563 @ifset COFF
4564 @node Def
4565 @section @code{.def @var{name}}
4566
4567 @cindex @code{def} directive
4568 @cindex COFF symbols, debugging
4569 @cindex debugging COFF symbols
4570 Begin defining debugging information for a symbol @var{name}; the
4571 definition extends until the @code{.endef} directive is encountered.
4572 @ifset BOUT
4573
4574 This directive is only observed when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF
4575 format output; when producing @code{b.out}, @samp{.def} is recognized,
4576 but ignored.
4577 @end ifset
4578 @end ifset
4579
4580 @ifset aout-bout
4581 @node Desc
4582 @section @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4583
4584 @cindex @code{desc} directive
4585 @cindex COFF symbol descriptor
4586 @cindex symbol descriptor, COFF
4587 This directive sets the descriptor of the symbol (@pxref{Symbol Attributes})
4588 to the low 16 bits of an absolute expression.
4589
4590 @ifset COFF
4591 The @samp{.desc} directive is not available when @command{@value{AS}} is
4592 configured for COFF output; it is only for @code{a.out} or @code{b.out}
4593 object format. For the sake of compatibility, @command{@value{AS}} accepts
4594 it, but produces no output, when configured for COFF.
4595 @end ifset
4596 @end ifset
4597
4598 @ifset COFF
4599 @node Dim
4600 @section @code{.dim}
4601
4602 @cindex @code{dim} directive
4603 @cindex COFF auxiliary symbol information
4604 @cindex auxiliary symbol information, COFF
4605 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
4606 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
4607 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.
4608 @ifset BOUT
4609
4610 @samp{.dim} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
4611 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
4612 ignores it.
4613 @end ifset
4614 @end ifset
4615
4616 @node Double
4617 @section @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4618
4619 @cindex @code{double} directive
4620 @cindex floating point numbers (double)
4621 @code{.double} expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
4622 assembles floating point numbers.
4623 @ifset GENERIC
4624 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
4625 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4626 @end ifset
4627 @ifclear GENERIC
4628 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
4629 On the @value{TARGET} family @samp{.double} emits 64-bit floating-point numbers
4630 in @sc{ieee} format.
4631 @end ifset
4632 @end ifclear
4633
4634 @node Eject
4635 @section @code{.eject}
4636
4637 @cindex @code{eject} directive
4638 @cindex new page, in listings
4639 @cindex page, in listings
4640 @cindex listing control: new page
4641 Force a page break at this point, when generating assembly listings.
4642
4643 @node Else
4644 @section @code{.else}
4645
4646 @cindex @code{else} directive
4647 @code{.else} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
4648 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It marks the beginning of a section
4649 of code to be assembled if the condition for the preceding @code{.if}
4650 was false.
4651
4652 @node Elseif
4653 @section @code{.elseif}
4654
4655 @cindex @code{elseif} directive
4656 @code{.elseif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
4657 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It is shorthand for beginning a new
4658 @code{.if} block that would otherwise fill the entire @code{.else} section.
4659
4660 @node End
4661 @section @code{.end}
4662
4663 @cindex @code{end} directive
4664 @code{.end} marks the end of the assembly file. @command{@value{AS}} does not
4665 process anything in the file past the @code{.end} directive.
4666
4667 @ifset COFF
4668 @node Endef
4669 @section @code{.endef}
4670
4671 @cindex @code{endef} directive
4672 This directive flags the end of a symbol definition begun with
4673 @code{.def}.
4674 @ifset BOUT
4675
4676 @samp{.endef} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; if
4677 @command{@value{AS}} is configured to generate @code{b.out}, it accepts this
4678 directive but ignores it.
4679 @end ifset
4680 @end ifset
4681
4682 @node Endfunc
4683 @section @code{.endfunc}
4684 @cindex @code{endfunc} directive
4685 @code{.endfunc} marks the end of a function specified with @code{.func}.
4686
4687 @node Endif
4688 @section @code{.endif}
4689
4690 @cindex @code{endif} directive
4691 @code{.endif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional assembly;
4692 it marks the end of a block of code that is only assembled
4693 conditionally. @xref{If,,@code{.if}}.
4694
4695 @node Equ
4696 @section @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4697
4698 @cindex @code{equ} directive
4699 @cindex assigning values to symbols
4700 @cindex symbols, assigning values to
4701 This directive sets the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}.
4702 It is synonymous with @samp{.set}; see @ref{Set,,@code{.set}}.
4703
4704 @ifset HPPA
4705 The syntax for @code{equ} on the HPPA is
4706 @samp{@var{symbol} .equ @var{expression}}.
4707 @end ifset
4708
4709 @ifset Z80
4710 The syntax for @code{equ} on the Z80 is
4711 @samp{@var{symbol} equ @var{expression}}.
4712 On the Z80 it is an eror if @var{symbol} is already defined,
4713 but the symbol is not protected from later redefinition.
4714 Compare @ref{Equiv}.
4715 @end ifset
4716
4717 @node Equiv
4718 @section @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4719 @cindex @code{equiv} directive
4720 The @code{.equiv} directive is like @code{.equ} and @code{.set}, except that
4721 the assembler will signal an error if @var{symbol} is already defined. Note a
4722 symbol which has been referenced but not actually defined is considered to be
4723 undefined.
4724
4725 Except for the contents of the error message, this is roughly equivalent to
4726 @smallexample
4727 .ifdef SYM
4728 .err
4729 .endif
4730 .equ SYM,VAL
4731 @end smallexample
4732 plus it protects the symbol from later redefinition.
4733
4734 @node Eqv
4735 @section @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4736 @cindex @code{eqv} directive
4737 The @code{.eqv} directive is like @code{.equiv}, but no attempt is made to
4738 evaluate the expression or any part of it immediately. Instead each time
4739 the resulting symbol is used in an expression, a snapshot of its current
4740 value is taken.
4741
4742 @node Err
4743 @section @code{.err}
4744 @cindex @code{err} directive
4745 If @command{@value{AS}} assembles a @code{.err} directive, it will print an error
4746 message and, unless the @option{-Z} option was used, it will not generate an
4747 object file. This can be used to signal an error in conditionally compiled code.
4748
4749 @node Error
4750 @section @code{.error "@var{string}"}
4751 @cindex error directive
4752
4753 Similarly to @code{.err}, this directive emits an error, but you can specify a
4754 string that will be emitted as the error message. If you don't specify the
4755 message, it defaults to @code{".error directive invoked in source file"}.
4756 @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
4757
4758 @smallexample
4759 .error "This code has not been assembled and tested."
4760 @end smallexample
4761
4762 @node Exitm
4763 @section @code{.exitm}
4764 Exit early from the current macro definition. @xref{Macro}.
4765
4766 @node Extern
4767 @section @code{.extern}
4768
4769 @cindex @code{extern} directive
4770 @code{.extern} is accepted in the source program---for compatibility
4771 with other assemblers---but it is ignored. @command{@value{AS}} treats
4772 all undefined symbols as external.
4773
4774 @node Fail
4775 @section @code{.fail @var{expression}}
4776
4777 @cindex @code{fail} directive
4778 Generates an error or a warning. If the value of the @var{expression} is 500
4779 or more, @command{@value{AS}} will print a warning message. If the value is less
4780 than 500, @command{@value{AS}} will print an error message. The message will
4781 include the value of @var{expression}. This can occasionally be useful inside
4782 complex nested macros or conditional assembly.
4783
4784 @node File
4785 @section @code{.file}
4786 @cindex @code{file} directive
4787
4788 @ifclear no-file-dir
4789 There are two different versions of the @code{.file} directive. Targets
4790 that support DWARF2 line number information use the DWARF2 version of
4791 @code{.file}. Other targets use the default version.
4792
4793 @subheading Default Version
4794
4795 @cindex logical file name
4796 @cindex file name, logical
4797 This version of the @code{.file} directive tells @command{@value{AS}} that we
4798 are about to start a new logical file. The syntax is:
4799
4800 @smallexample
4801 .file @var{string}
4802 @end smallexample
4803
4804 @var{string} is the new file name. In general, the filename is
4805 recognized whether or not it is surrounded by quotes @samp{"}; but if you wish
4806 to specify an empty file name, you must give the quotes--@code{""}. This
4807 statement may go away in future: it is only recognized to be compatible with
4808 old @command{@value{AS}} programs.
4809
4810 @subheading DWARF2 Version
4811 @end ifclear
4812
4813 When emitting DWARF2 line number information, @code{.file} assigns filenames
4814 to the @code{.debug_line} file name table. The syntax is:
4815
4816 @smallexample
4817 .file @var{fileno} @var{filename}
4818 @end smallexample
4819
4820 The @var{fileno} operand should be a unique positive integer to use as the
4821 index of the entry in the table. The @var{filename} operand is a C string
4822 literal.
4823
4824 The detail of filename indices is exposed to the user because the filename
4825 table is shared with the @code{.debug_info} section of the DWARF2 debugging
4826 information, and thus the user must know the exact indices that table
4827 entries will have.
4828
4829 @node Fill
4830 @section @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4831
4832 @cindex @code{fill} directive
4833 @cindex writing patterns in memory
4834 @cindex patterns, writing in memory
4835 @var{repeat}, @var{size} and @var{value} are absolute expressions.
4836 This emits @var{repeat} copies of @var{size} bytes. @var{Repeat}
4837 may be zero or more. @var{Size} may be zero or more, but if it is
4838 more than 8, then it is deemed to have the value 8, compatible with
4839 other people's assemblers. The contents of each @var{repeat} bytes
4840 is taken from an 8-byte number. The highest order 4 bytes are
4841 zero. The lowest order 4 bytes are @var{value} rendered in the
4842 byte-order of an integer on the computer @command{@value{AS}} is assembling for.
4843 Each @var{size} bytes in a repetition is taken from the lowest order
4844 @var{size} bytes of this number. Again, this bizarre behavior is
4845 compatible with other people's assemblers.
4846
4847 @var{size} and @var{value} are optional.
4848 If the second comma and @var{value} are absent, @var{value} is
4849 assumed zero. If the first comma and following tokens are absent,
4850 @var{size} is assumed to be 1.
4851
4852 @node Float
4853 @section @code{.float @var{flonums}}
4854
4855 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
4856 @cindex @code{float} directive
4857 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
4858 has the same effect as @code{.single}.
4859 @ifset GENERIC
4860 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
4861 @command{@value{AS}} is configured.
4862 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4863 @end ifset
4864 @ifclear GENERIC
4865 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
4866 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.float} emits 32-bit floating point numbers
4867 in @sc{ieee} format.
4868 @end ifset
4869 @end ifclear
4870
4871 @node Func
4872 @section @code{.func @var{name}[,@var{label}]}
4873 @cindex @code{func} directive
4874 @code{.func} emits debugging information to denote function @var{name}, and
4875 is ignored unless the file is assembled with debugging enabled.
4876 Only @samp{--gstabs[+]} is currently supported.
4877 @var{label} is the entry point of the function and if omitted @var{name}
4878 prepended with the @samp{leading char} is used.
4879 @samp{leading char} is usually @code{_} or nothing, depending on the target.
4880 All functions are currently defined to have @code{void} return type.
4881 The function must be terminated with @code{.endfunc}.
4882
4883 @node Global
4884 @section @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
4885
4886 @cindex @code{global} directive
4887 @cindex symbol, making visible to linker
4888 @code{.global} makes the symbol visible to @code{@value{LD}}. If you define
4889 @var{symbol} in your partial program, its value is made available to
4890 other partial programs that are linked with it. Otherwise,
4891 @var{symbol} takes its attributes from a symbol of the same name
4892 from another file linked into the same program.
4893
4894 Both spellings (@samp{.globl} and @samp{.global}) are accepted, for
4895 compatibility with other assemblers.
4896
4897 @ifset HPPA
4898 On the HPPA, @code{.global} is not always enough to make it accessible to other
4899 partial programs. You may need the HPPA-only @code{.EXPORT} directive as well.
4900 @xref{HPPA Directives, ,HPPA Assembler Directives}.
4901 @end ifset
4902
4903 @ifset ELF
4904 @node Gnu_attribute
4905 @section @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
4906 Record a @sc{gnu} object attribute for this file. @xref{Object Attributes}.
4907
4908 @node Hidden
4909 @section @code{.hidden @var{names}}
4910
4911 @cindex @code{hidden} directive
4912 @cindex visibility
4913 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
4914 @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal,,@code{.internal}}) and
4915 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
4916
4917 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
4918 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
4919 @code{hidden} which means that the symbols are not visible to other components.
4920 Such symbols are always considered to be @code{protected} as well.
4921 @end ifset
4922
4923 @node hword
4924 @section @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
4925
4926 @cindex @code{hword} directive
4927 @cindex integers, 16-bit
4928 @cindex numbers, 16-bit
4929 @cindex sixteen bit integers
4930 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
4931 a 16 bit number for each.
4932
4933 @ifset GENERIC
4934 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}; depending on the target
4935 architecture, it may also be a synonym for @samp{.word}.
4936 @end ifset
4937 @ifclear GENERIC
4938 @ifset W32
4939 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}.
4940 @end ifset
4941 @ifset W16
4942 This directive is a synonym for both @samp{.short} and @samp{.word}.
4943 @end ifset
4944 @end ifclear
4945
4946 @node Ident
4947 @section @code{.ident}
4948
4949 @cindex @code{ident} directive
4950
4951 This directive is used by some assemblers to place tags in object files. The
4952 behavior of this directive varies depending on the target. When using the
4953 a.out object file format, @command{@value{AS}} simply accepts the directive for
4954 source-file compatibility with existing assemblers, but does not emit anything
4955 for it. When using COFF, comments are emitted to the @code{.comment} or
4956 @code{.rdata} section, depending on the target. When using ELF, comments are
4957 emitted to the @code{.comment} section.
4958
4959 @node If
4960 @section @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
4961
4962 @cindex conditional assembly
4963 @cindex @code{if} directive
4964 @code{.if} marks the beginning of a section of code which is only
4965 considered part of the source program being assembled if the argument
4966 (which must be an @var{absolute expression}) is non-zero. The end of
4967 the conditional section of code must be marked by @code{.endif}
4968 (@pxref{Endif,,@code{.endif}}); optionally, you may include code for the
4969 alternative condition, flagged by @code{.else} (@pxref{Else,,@code{.else}}).
4970 If you have several conditions to check, @code{.elseif} may be used to avoid
4971 nesting blocks if/else within each subsequent @code{.else} block.
4972
4973 The following variants of @code{.if} are also supported:
4974 @table @code
4975 @cindex @code{ifdef} directive
4976 @item .ifdef @var{symbol}
4977 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
4978 has been defined. Note a symbol which has been referenced but not yet defined
4979 is considered to be undefined.
4980
4981 @cindex @code{ifb} directive
4982 @item .ifb @var{text}
4983 Assembles the following section of code if the operand is blank (empty).
4984
4985 @cindex @code{ifc} directive
4986 @item .ifc @var{string1},@var{string2}
4987 Assembles the following section of code if the two strings are the same. The
4988 strings may be optionally quoted with single quotes. If they are not quoted,
4989 the first string stops at the first comma, and the second string stops at the
4990 end of the line. Strings which contain whitespace should be quoted. The
4991 string comparison is case sensitive.
4992
4993 @cindex @code{ifeq} directive
4994 @item .ifeq @var{absolute expression}
4995 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is zero.
4996
4997 @cindex @code{ifeqs} directive
4998 @item .ifeqs @var{string1},@var{string2}
4999 Another form of @code{.ifc}. The strings must be quoted using double quotes.
5000
5001 @cindex @code{ifge} directive
5002 @item .ifge @var{absolute expression}
5003 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than or
5004 equal to zero.
5005
5006 @cindex @code{ifgt} directive
5007 @item .ifgt @var{absolute expression}
5008 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than zero.
5009
5010 @cindex @code{ifle} directive
5011 @item .ifle @var{absolute expression}
5012 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than or equal
5013 to zero.
5014
5015 @cindex @code{iflt} directive
5016 @item .iflt @var{absolute expression}
5017 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than zero.
5018
5019 @cindex @code{ifnb} directive
5020 @item .ifnb @var{text}
5021 Like @code{.ifb}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5022 following section of code if the operand is non-blank (non-empty).
5023
5024 @cindex @code{ifnc} directive
5025 @item .ifnc @var{string1},@var{string2}.
5026 Like @code{.ifc}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5027 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5028
5029 @cindex @code{ifndef} directive
5030 @cindex @code{ifnotdef} directive
5031 @item .ifndef @var{symbol}
5032 @itemx .ifnotdef @var{symbol}
5033 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5034 has not been defined. Both spelling variants are equivalent. Note a symbol
5035 which has been referenced but not yet defined is considered to be undefined.
5036
5037 @cindex @code{ifne} directive
5038 @item .ifne @var{absolute expression}
5039 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is not equal to zero
5040 (in other words, this is equivalent to @code{.if}).
5041
5042 @cindex @code{ifnes} directive
5043 @item .ifnes @var{string1},@var{string2}
5044 Like @code{.ifeqs}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5045 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5046 @end table
5047
5048 @node Incbin
5049 @section @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
5050
5051 @cindex @code{incbin} directive
5052 @cindex binary files, including
5053 The @code{incbin} directive includes @var{file} verbatim at the current
5054 location. You can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line
5055 option (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5056 around @var{file}.
5057
5058 The @var{skip} argument skips a number of bytes from the start of the
5059 @var{file}. The @var{count} argument indicates the maximum number of bytes to
5060 read. Note that the data is not aligned in any way, so it is the user's
5061 responsibility to make sure that proper alignment is provided both before and
5062 after the @code{incbin} directive.
5063
5064 @node Include
5065 @section @code{.include "@var{file}"}
5066
5067 @cindex @code{include} directive
5068 @cindex supporting files, including
5069 @cindex files, including
5070 This directive provides a way to include supporting files at specified
5071 points in your source program. The code from @var{file} is assembled as
5072 if it followed the point of the @code{.include}; when the end of the
5073 included file is reached, assembly of the original file continues. You
5074 can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line option
5075 (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5076 around @var{file}.
5077
5078 @node Int
5079 @section @code{.int @var{expressions}}
5080
5081 @cindex @code{int} directive
5082 @cindex integers, 32-bit
5083 Expect zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section, separated by commas.
5084 For each expression, emit a number that, at run time, is the value of that
5085 expression. The byte order and bit size of the number depends on what kind
5086 of target the assembly is for.
5087
5088 @ifclear GENERIC
5089 @ifset H8
5090 On most forms of the H8/300, @code{.int} emits 16-bit
5091 integers. On the H8/300H and the Renesas SH, however, @code{.int} emits
5092 32-bit integers.
5093 @end ifset
5094 @end ifclear
5095
5096 @ifset ELF
5097 @node Internal
5098 @section @code{.internal @var{names}}
5099
5100 @cindex @code{internal} directive
5101 @cindex visibility
5102 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5103 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden,,@code{.hidden}}) and
5104 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5105
5106 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5107 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5108 @code{internal} which means that the symbols are considered to be @code{hidden}
5109 (i.e., not visible to other components), and that some extra, processor specific
5110 processing must also be performed upon the symbols as well.
5111 @end ifset
5112
5113 @node Irp
5114 @section @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5115
5116 @cindex @code{irp} directive
5117 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5118 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irp} directive, and is
5119 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each @var{value}, @var{symbol} is
5120 set to @var{value}, and the sequence of statements is assembled. If no
5121 @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is assembled once, with
5122 @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to @var{symbol} within the
5123 sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5124
5125 For example, assembling
5126
5127 @example
5128 .irp param,1,2,3
5129 move d\param,sp@@-
5130 .endr
5131 @end example
5132
5133 is equivalent to assembling
5134
5135 @example
5136 move d1,sp@@-
5137 move d2,sp@@-
5138 move d3,sp@@-
5139 @end example
5140
5141 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also @ref{Macro}.
5142
5143 @node Irpc
5144 @section @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5145
5146 @cindex @code{irpc} directive
5147 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5148 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irpc} directive, and is
5149 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each character in @var{value},
5150 @var{symbol} is set to the character, and the sequence of statements is
5151 assembled. If no @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is
5152 assembled once, with @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to
5153 @var{symbol} within the sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5154
5155 For example, assembling
5156
5157 @example
5158 .irpc param,123
5159 move d\param,sp@@-
5160 .endr
5161 @end example
5162
5163 is equivalent to assembling
5164
5165 @example
5166 move d1,sp@@-
5167 move d2,sp@@-
5168 move d3,sp@@-
5169 @end example
5170
5171 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also the discussion
5172 at @xref{Macro}.
5173
5174 @node Lcomm
5175 @section @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
5176
5177 @cindex @code{lcomm} directive
5178 @cindex local common symbols
5179 @cindex symbols, local common
5180 Reserve @var{length} (an absolute expression) bytes for a local common
5181 denoted by @var{symbol}. The section and value of @var{symbol} are
5182 those of the new local common. The addresses are allocated in the bss
5183 section, so that at run-time the bytes start off zeroed. @var{Symbol}
5184 is not declared global (@pxref{Global,,@code{.global}}), so is normally
5185 not visible to @code{@value{LD}}.
5186
5187 @ifset GENERIC
5188 Some targets permit a third argument to be used with @code{.lcomm}. This
5189 argument specifies the desired alignment of the symbol in the bss section.
5190 @end ifset
5191
5192 @ifset HPPA
5193 The syntax for @code{.lcomm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
5194 @samp{@var{symbol} .lcomm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
5195 @end ifset
5196
5197 @node Lflags
5198 @section @code{.lflags}
5199
5200 @cindex @code{lflags} directive (ignored)
5201 @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive, for compatibility with other
5202 assemblers, but ignores it.
5203
5204 @ifclear no-line-dir
5205 @node Line
5206 @section @code{.line @var{line-number}}
5207
5208 @cindex @code{line} directive
5209 @cindex logical line number
5210 @ifset aout-bout
5211 Change the logical line number. @var{line-number} must be an absolute
5212 expression. The next line has that logical line number. Therefore any other
5213 statements on the current line (after a statement separator character) are
5214 reported as on logical line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1. One day
5215 @command{@value{AS}} will no longer support this directive: it is recognized only
5216 for compatibility with existing assembler programs.
5217 @end ifset
5218
5219 Even though this is a directive associated with the @code{a.out} or
5220 @code{b.out} object-code formats, @command{@value{AS}} still recognizes it
5221 when producing COFF output, and treats @samp{.line} as though it
5222 were the COFF @samp{.ln} @emph{if} it is found outside a
5223 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair.
5224
5225 Inside a @code{.def}, @samp{.line} is, instead, one of the directives
5226 used by compilers to generate auxiliary symbol information for
5227 debugging.
5228 @end ifclear
5229
5230 @node Linkonce
5231 @section @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
5232 @cindex COMDAT
5233 @cindex @code{linkonce} directive
5234 @cindex common sections
5235 Mark the current section so that the linker only includes a single copy of it.
5236 This may be used to include the same section in several different object files,
5237 but ensure that the linker will only include it once in the final output file.
5238 The @code{.linkonce} pseudo-op must be used for each instance of the section.
5239 Duplicate sections are detected based on the section name, so it should be
5240 unique.
5241
5242 This directive is only supported by a few object file formats; as of this
5243 writing, the only object file format which supports it is the Portable
5244 Executable format used on Windows NT.
5245
5246 The @var{type} argument is optional. If specified, it must be one of the
5247 following strings. For example:
5248 @smallexample
5249 .linkonce same_size
5250 @end smallexample
5251 Not all types may be supported on all object file formats.
5252
5253 @table @code
5254 @item discard
5255 Silently discard duplicate sections. This is the default.
5256
5257 @item one_only
5258 Warn if there are duplicate sections, but still keep only one copy.
5259
5260 @item same_size
5261 Warn if any of the duplicates have different sizes.
5262
5263 @item same_contents
5264 Warn if any of the duplicates do not have exactly the same contents.
5265 @end table
5266
5267 @node List
5268 @section @code{.list}
5269
5270 @cindex @code{list} directive
5271 @cindex listing control, turning on
5272 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.nolist} directive) whether or
5273 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5274 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5275 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5276 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5277
5278 By default, listings are disabled. When you enable them (with the
5279 @samp{-a} command line option; @pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}),
5280 the initial value of the listing counter is one.
5281
5282 @node Ln
5283 @section @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
5284
5285 @cindex @code{ln} directive
5286 @ifclear no-line-dir
5287 @samp{.ln} is a synonym for @samp{.line}.
5288 @end ifclear
5289 @ifset no-line-dir
5290 Tell @command{@value{AS}} to change the logical line number. @var{line-number}
5291 must be an absolute expression. The next line has that logical
5292 line number, so any other statements on the current line (after a
5293 statement separator character @code{;}) are reported as on logical
5294 line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1.
5295 @ifset BOUT
5296
5297 This directive is accepted, but ignored, when @command{@value{AS}} is
5298 configured for @code{b.out}; its effect is only associated with COFF
5299 output format.
5300 @end ifset
5301 @end ifset
5302
5303 @node Loc
5304 @section @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno} [@var{column}] [@var{options}]}
5305 @cindex @code{loc} directive
5306 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5307 the @code{.loc} directive will add a row to the @code{.debug_line} line
5308 number matrix corresponding to the immediately following assembly
5309 instruction. The @var{fileno}, @var{lineno}, and optional @var{column}
5310 arguments will be applied to the @code{.debug_line} state machine before
5311 the row is added.
5312
5313 The @var{options} are a sequence of the following tokens in any order:
5314
5315 @table @code
5316 @item basic_block
5317 This option will set the @code{basic_block} register in the
5318 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5319
5320 @item prologue_end
5321 This option will set the @code{prologue_end} register in the
5322 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5323
5324 @item epilogue_begin
5325 This option will set the @code{epilogue_begin} register in the
5326 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5327
5328 @item is_stmt @var{value}
5329 This option will set the @code{is_stmt} register in the
5330 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{value}, which must be
5331 either 0 or 1.
5332
5333 @item isa @var{value}
5334 This directive will set the @code{isa} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5335 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5336
5337 @item discriminator @var{value}
5338 This directive will set the @code{discriminator} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5339 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5340
5341 @end table
5342
5343 @node Loc_mark_labels
5344 @section @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
5345 @cindex @code{loc_mark_labels} directive
5346 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5347 the @code{.loc_mark_labels} directive makes the assembler emit an entry
5348 to the @code{.debug_line} line number matrix with the @code{basic_block}
5349 register in the state machine set whenever a code label is seen.
5350 The @var{enable} argument should be either 1 or 0, to enable or disable
5351 this function respectively.
5352
5353 @ifset ELF
5354 @node Local
5355 @section @code{.local @var{names}}
5356
5357 @cindex @code{local} directive
5358 This directive, which is available for ELF targets, marks each symbol in
5359 the comma-separated list of @code{names} as a local symbol so that it
5360 will not be externally visible. If the symbols do not already exist,
5361 they will be created.
5362
5363 For targets where the @code{.lcomm} directive (@pxref{Lcomm}) does not
5364 accept an alignment argument, which is the case for most ELF targets,
5365 the @code{.local} directive can be used in combination with @code{.comm}
5366 (@pxref{Comm}) to define aligned local common data.
5367 @end ifset
5368
5369 @node Long
5370 @section @code{.long @var{expressions}}
5371
5372 @cindex @code{long} directive
5373 @code{.long} is the same as @samp{.int}. @xref{Int,,@code{.int}}.
5374
5375 @ignore
5376 @c no one seems to know what this is for or whether this description is
5377 @c what it really ought to do
5378 @node Lsym
5379 @section @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5380
5381 @cindex @code{lsym} directive
5382 @cindex symbol, not referenced in assembly
5383 @code{.lsym} creates a new symbol named @var{symbol}, but does not put it in
5384 the hash table, ensuring it cannot be referenced by name during the
5385 rest of the assembly. This sets the attributes of the symbol to be
5386 the same as the expression value:
5387 @smallexample
5388 @var{other} = @var{descriptor} = 0
5389 @var{type} = @r{(section of @var{expression})}
5390 @var{value} = @var{expression}
5391 @end smallexample
5392 @noindent
5393 The new symbol is not flagged as external.
5394 @end ignore
5395
5396 @node Macro
5397 @section @code{.macro}
5398
5399 @cindex macros
5400 The commands @code{.macro} and @code{.endm} allow you to define macros that
5401 generate assembly output. For example, this definition specifies a macro
5402 @code{sum} that puts a sequence of numbers into memory:
5403
5404 @example
5405 .macro sum from=0, to=5
5406 .long \from
5407 .if \to-\from
5408 sum "(\from+1)",\to
5409 .endif
5410 .endm
5411 @end example
5412
5413 @noindent
5414 With that definition, @samp{SUM 0,5} is equivalent to this assembly input:
5415
5416 @example
5417 .long 0
5418 .long 1
5419 .long 2
5420 .long 3
5421 .long 4
5422 .long 5
5423 @end example
5424
5425 @ftable @code
5426 @item .macro @var{macname}
5427 @itemx .macro @var{macname} @var{macargs} @dots{}
5428 @cindex @code{macro} directive
5429 Begin the definition of a macro called @var{macname}. If your macro
5430 definition requires arguments, specify their names after the macro name,
5431 separated by commas or spaces. You can qualify the macro argument to
5432 indicate whether all invocations must specify a non-blank value (through
5433 @samp{:@code{req}}), or whether it takes all of the remaining arguments
5434 (through @samp{:@code{vararg}}). You can supply a default value for any
5435 macro argument by following the name with @samp{=@var{deflt}}. You
5436 cannot define two macros with the same @var{macname} unless it has been
5437 subject to the @code{.purgem} directive (@pxref{Purgem}) between the two
5438 definitions. For example, these are all valid @code{.macro} statements:
5439
5440 @table @code
5441 @item .macro comm
5442 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{comm}, which takes no
5443 arguments.
5444
5445 @item .macro plus1 p, p1
5446 @itemx .macro plus1 p p1
5447 Either statement begins the definition of a macro called @code{plus1},
5448 which takes two arguments; within the macro definition, write
5449 @samp{\p} or @samp{\p1} to evaluate the arguments.
5450
5451 @item .macro reserve_str p1=0 p2
5452 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{reserve_str}, with two
5453 arguments. The first argument has a default value, but not the second.
5454 After the definition is complete, you can call the macro either as
5455 @samp{reserve_str @var{a},@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating to
5456 @var{a} and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}), or as @samp{reserve_str
5457 ,@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating as the default, in this case
5458 @samp{0}, and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}).
5459
5460 @item .macro m p1:req, p2=0, p3:vararg
5461 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{m}, with at least three
5462 arguments. The first argument must always have a value specified, but
5463 not the second, which instead has a default value. The third formal
5464 will get assigned all remaining arguments specified at invocation time.
5465
5466 When you call a macro, you can specify the argument values either by
5467 position, or by keyword. For example, @samp{sum 9,17} is equivalent to
5468 @samp{sum to=17, from=9}.
5469
5470 @end table
5471
5472 Note that since each of the @var{macargs} can be an identifier exactly
5473 as any other one permitted by the target architecture, there may be
5474 occasional problems if the target hand-crafts special meanings to certain
5475 characters when they occur in a special position. For example, if the colon
5476 (@code{:}) is generally permitted to be part of a symbol name, but the
5477 architecture specific code special-cases it when occurring as the final
5478 character of a symbol (to denote a label), then the macro parameter
5479 replacement code will have no way of knowing that and consider the whole
5480 construct (including the colon) an identifier, and check only this
5481 identifier for being the subject to parameter substitution. So for example
5482 this macro definition:
5483
5484 @example
5485 .macro label l
5486 \l:
5487 .endm
5488 @end example
5489
5490 might not work as expected. Invoking @samp{label foo} might not create a label
5491 called @samp{foo} but instead just insert the text @samp{\l:} into the
5492 assembler source, probably generating an error about an unrecognised
5493 identifier.
5494
5495 Similarly problems might occur with the period character (@samp{.})
5496 which is often allowed inside opcode names (and hence identifier names). So
5497 for example constructing a macro to build an opcode from a base name and a
5498 length specifier like this:
5499
5500 @example
5501 .macro opcode base length
5502 \base.\length
5503 .endm
5504 @end example
5505
5506 and invoking it as @samp{opcode store l} will not create a @samp{store.l}
5507 instruction but instead generate some kind of error as the assembler tries to
5508 interpret the text @samp{\base.\length}.
5509
5510 There are several possible ways around this problem:
5511
5512 @table @code
5513 @item Insert white space
5514 If it is possible to use white space characters then this is the simplest
5515 solution. eg:
5516
5517 @example
5518 .macro label l
5519 \l :
5520 .endm
5521 @end example
5522
5523 @item Use @samp{\()}
5524 The string @samp{\()} can be used to separate the end of a macro argument from
5525 the following text. eg:
5526
5527 @example
5528 .macro opcode base length
5529 \base\().\length
5530 .endm
5531 @end example
5532
5533 @item Use the alternate macro syntax mode
5534 In the alternative macro syntax mode the ampersand character (@samp{&}) can be
5535 used as a separator. eg:
5536
5537 @example
5538 .altmacro
5539 .macro label l
5540 l&:
5541 .endm
5542 @end example
5543 @end table
5544
5545 Note: this problem of correctly identifying string parameters to pseudo ops
5546 also applies to the identifiers used in @code{.irp} (@pxref{Irp})
5547 and @code{.irpc} (@pxref{Irpc}) as well.
5548
5549 @item .endm
5550 @cindex @code{endm} directive
5551 Mark the end of a macro definition.
5552
5553 @item .exitm
5554 @cindex @code{exitm} directive
5555 Exit early from the current macro definition.
5556
5557 @cindex number of macros executed
5558 @cindex macros, count executed
5559 @item \@@
5560 @command{@value{AS}} maintains a counter of how many macros it has
5561 executed in this pseudo-variable; you can copy that number to your
5562 output with @samp{\@@}, but @emph{only within a macro definition}.
5563
5564 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
5565 @emph{Warning: @code{LOCAL} is only available if you select ``alternate
5566 macro syntax'' with @samp{--alternate} or @code{.altmacro}.}
5567 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
5568 @end ftable
5569
5570 @node MRI
5571 @section @code{.mri @var{val}}
5572
5573 @cindex @code{mri} directive
5574 @cindex MRI mode, temporarily
5575 If @var{val} is non-zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to enter MRI mode. If
5576 @var{val} is zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to exit MRI mode. This change
5577 affects code assembled until the next @code{.mri} directive, or until the end
5578 of the file. @xref{M, MRI mode, MRI mode}.
5579
5580 @node Noaltmacro
5581 @section @code{.noaltmacro}
5582 Disable alternate macro mode. @xref{Altmacro}.
5583
5584 @node Nolist
5585 @section @code{.nolist}
5586
5587 @cindex @code{nolist} directive
5588 @cindex listing control, turning off
5589 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.list} directive) whether or
5590 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5591 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5592 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5593 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5594
5595 @node Octa
5596 @section @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
5597
5598 @c FIXME: double size emitted for "octa" on i960, others? Or warn?
5599 @cindex @code{octa} directive
5600 @cindex integer, 16-byte
5601 @cindex sixteen byte integer
5602 This directive expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For each
5603 bignum, it emits a 16-byte integer.
5604
5605 The term ``octa'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
5606 hence @emph{octa}-word for 16 bytes.
5607
5608 @node Offset
5609 @section @code{.offset @var{loc}}
5610
5611 @cindex @code{offset} directive
5612 Set the location counter to @var{loc} in the absolute section. @var{loc} must
5613 be an absolute expression. This directive may be useful for defining
5614 symbols with absolute values. Do not confuse it with the @code{.org}
5615 directive.
5616
5617 @node Org
5618 @section @code{.org @var{new-lc} , @var{fill}}
5619
5620 @cindex @code{org} directive
5621 @cindex location counter, advancing
5622 @cindex advancing location counter
5623 @cindex current address, advancing
5624 Advance the location counter of the current section to
5625 @var{new-lc}. @var{new-lc} is either an absolute expression or an
5626 expression with the same section as the current subsection. That is,
5627 you can't use @code{.org} to cross sections: if @var{new-lc} has the
5628 wrong section, the @code{.org} directive is ignored. To be compatible
5629 with former assemblers, if the section of @var{new-lc} is absolute,
5630 @command{@value{AS}} issues a warning, then pretends the section of @var{new-lc}
5631 is the same as the current subsection.
5632
5633 @code{.org} may only increase the location counter, or leave it
5634 unchanged; you cannot use @code{.org} to move the location counter
5635 backwards.
5636
5637 @c double negative used below "not undefined" because this is a specific
5638 @c reference to "undefined" (as SEG_UNKNOWN is called in this manual)
5639 @c section. doc@cygnus.com 18feb91
5640 Because @command{@value{AS}} tries to assemble programs in one pass, @var{new-lc}
5641 may not be undefined. If you really detest this restriction we eagerly await
5642 a chance to share your improved assembler.
5643
5644 Beware that the origin is relative to the start of the section, not
5645 to the start of the subsection. This is compatible with other
5646 people's assemblers.
5647
5648 When the location counter (of the current subsection) is advanced, the
5649 intervening bytes are filled with @var{fill} which should be an
5650 absolute expression. If the comma and @var{fill} are omitted,
5651 @var{fill} defaults to zero.
5652
5653 @node P2align
5654 @section @code{.p2align[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
5655
5656 @cindex padding the location counter given a power of two
5657 @cindex @code{p2align} directive
5658 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
5659 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
5660 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
5661 advancement. For example @samp{.p2align 3} advances the location
5662 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
5663 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
5664
5665 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
5666 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
5667 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
5668 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
5669 with no-op instructions.
5670
5671 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
5672 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
5673 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
5674 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
5675 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
5676 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
5677 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
5678
5679 @cindex @code{p2alignw} directive
5680 @cindex @code{p2alignl} directive
5681 The @code{.p2alignw} and @code{.p2alignl} directives are variants of the
5682 @code{.p2align} directive. The @code{.p2alignw} directive treats the fill
5683 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.p2alignl} directives treats the
5684 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.p2alignw
5685 2,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
5686 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
5687 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
5688 undefined.
5689
5690 @ifset ELF
5691 @node PopSection
5692 @section @code{.popsection}
5693
5694 @cindex @code{popsection} directive
5695 @cindex Section Stack
5696 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
5697 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5698 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.previous}
5699 (@pxref{Previous}).
5700
5701 This directive replaces the current section (and subsection) with the top
5702 section (and subsection) on the section stack. This section is popped off the
5703 stack.
5704 @end ifset
5705
5706 @ifset ELF
5707 @node Previous
5708 @section @code{.previous}
5709
5710 @cindex @code{previous} directive
5711 @cindex Section Stack
5712 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
5713 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5714 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.popsection}
5715 (@pxref{PopSection}).
5716
5717 This directive swaps the current section (and subsection) with most recently
5718 referenced section/subsection pair prior to this one. Multiple
5719 @code{.previous} directives in a row will flip between two sections (and their
5720 subsections). For example:
5721
5722 @smallexample
5723 .section A
5724 .subsection 1
5725 .word 0x1234
5726 .subsection 2
5727 .word 0x5678
5728 .previous
5729 .word 0x9abc
5730 @end smallexample
5731
5732 Will place 0x1234 and 0x9abc into subsection 1 and 0x5678 into subsection 2 of
5733 section A. Whilst:
5734
5735 @smallexample
5736 .section A
5737 .subsection 1
5738 # Now in section A subsection 1
5739 .word 0x1234
5740 .section B
5741 .subsection 0
5742 # Now in section B subsection 0
5743 .word 0x5678
5744 .subsection 1
5745 # Now in section B subsection 1
5746 .word 0x9abc
5747 .previous
5748 # Now in section B subsection 0
5749 .word 0xdef0
5750 @end smallexample
5751
5752 Will place 0x1234 into section A, 0x5678 and 0xdef0 into subsection 0 of
5753 section B and 0x9abc into subsection 1 of section B.
5754
5755 In terms of the section stack, this directive swaps the current section with
5756 the top section on the section stack.
5757 @end ifset
5758
5759 @node Print
5760 @section @code{.print @var{string}}
5761
5762 @cindex @code{print} directive
5763 @command{@value{AS}} will print @var{string} on the standard output during
5764 assembly. You must put @var{string} in double quotes.
5765
5766 @ifset ELF
5767 @node Protected
5768 @section @code{.protected @var{names}}
5769
5770 @cindex @code{protected} directive
5771 @cindex visibility
5772 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5773 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden}) and @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal}).
5774
5775 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5776 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5777 @code{protected} which means that any references to the symbols from within the
5778 components that defines them must be resolved to the definition in that
5779 component, even if a definition in another component would normally preempt
5780 this.
5781 @end ifset
5782
5783 @node Psize
5784 @section @code{.psize @var{lines} , @var{columns}}
5785
5786 @cindex @code{psize} directive
5787 @cindex listing control: paper size
5788 @cindex paper size, for listings
5789 Use this directive to declare the number of lines---and, optionally, the
5790 number of columns---to use for each page, when generating listings.
5791
5792 If you do not use @code{.psize}, listings use a default line-count
5793 of 60. You may omit the comma and @var{columns} specification; the
5794 default width is 200 columns.
5795
5796 @command{@value{AS}} generates formfeeds whenever the specified number of
5797 lines is exceeded (or whenever you explicitly request one, using
5798 @code{.eject}).
5799
5800 If you specify @var{lines} as @code{0}, no formfeeds are generated save
5801 those explicitly specified with @code{.eject}.
5802
5803 @node Purgem
5804 @section @code{.purgem @var{name}}
5805
5806 @cindex @code{purgem} directive
5807 Undefine the macro @var{name}, so that later uses of the string will not be
5808 expanded. @xref{Macro}.
5809
5810 @ifset ELF
5811 @node PushSection
5812 @section @code{.pushsection @var{name} [, @var{subsection}] [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{arguments}]]]}
5813
5814 @cindex @code{pushsection} directive
5815 @cindex Section Stack
5816 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
5817 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5818 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
5819 (@pxref{Previous}).
5820
5821 This directive pushes the current section (and subsection) onto the
5822 top of the section stack, and then replaces the current section and
5823 subsection with @code{name} and @code{subsection}. The optional
5824 @code{flags}, @code{type} and @code{arguments} are treated the same
5825 as in the @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}) directive.
5826 @end ifset
5827
5828 @node Quad
5829 @section @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
5830
5831 @cindex @code{quad} directive
5832 @code{.quad} expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For
5833 each bignum, it emits
5834 @ifclear bignum-16
5835 an 8-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 8 bytes, it prints a
5836 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 8 bytes of the bignum.
5837 @cindex eight-byte integer
5838 @cindex integer, 8-byte
5839
5840 The term ``quad'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
5841 hence @emph{quad}-word for 8 bytes.
5842 @end ifclear
5843 @ifset bignum-16
5844 a 16-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 16 bytes, it prints a
5845 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 16 bytes of the bignum.
5846 @cindex sixteen-byte integer
5847 @cindex integer, 16-byte
5848 @end ifset
5849
5850 @node Reloc
5851 @section @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
5852
5853 @cindex @code{reloc} directive
5854 Generate a relocation at @var{offset} of type @var{reloc_name} with value
5855 @var{expression}. If @var{offset} is a number, the relocation is generated in
5856 the current section. If @var{offset} is an expression that resolves to a
5857 symbol plus offset, the relocation is generated in the given symbol's section.
5858 @var{expression}, if present, must resolve to a symbol plus addend or to an
5859 absolute value, but note that not all targets support an addend. e.g. ELF REL
5860 targets such as i386 store an addend in the section contents rather than in the
5861 relocation. This low level interface does not support addends stored in the
5862 section.
5863
5864 @node Rept
5865 @section @code{.rept @var{count}}
5866
5867 @cindex @code{rept} directive
5868 Repeat the sequence of lines between the @code{.rept} directive and the next
5869 @code{.endr} directive @var{count} times.
5870
5871 For example, assembling
5872
5873 @example
5874 .rept 3
5875 .long 0
5876 .endr
5877 @end example
5878
5879 is equivalent to assembling
5880
5881 @example
5882 .long 0
5883 .long 0
5884 .long 0
5885 @end example
5886
5887 @node Sbttl
5888 @section @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
5889
5890 @cindex @code{sbttl} directive
5891 @cindex subtitles for listings
5892 @cindex listing control: subtitle
5893 Use @var{subheading} as the title (third line, immediately after the
5894 title line) when generating assembly listings.
5895
5896 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
5897 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
5898
5899 @ifset COFF
5900 @node Scl
5901 @section @code{.scl @var{class}}
5902
5903 @cindex @code{scl} directive
5904 @cindex symbol storage class (COFF)
5905 @cindex COFF symbol storage class
5906 Set the storage-class value for a symbol. This directive may only be
5907 used inside a @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair. Storage class may flag
5908 whether a symbol is static or external, or it may record further
5909 symbolic debugging information.
5910 @ifset BOUT
5911
5912 The @samp{.scl} directive is primarily associated with COFF output; when
5913 configured to generate @code{b.out} output format, @command{@value{AS}}
5914 accepts this directive but ignores it.
5915 @end ifset
5916 @end ifset
5917
5918 @ifset COFF-ELF
5919 @node Section
5920 @section @code{.section @var{name}}
5921
5922 @cindex named section
5923 Use the @code{.section} directive to assemble the following code into a section
5924 named @var{name}.
5925
5926 This directive is only supported for targets that actually support arbitrarily
5927 named sections; on @code{a.out} targets, for example, it is not accepted, even
5928 with a standard @code{a.out} section name.
5929
5930 @ifset COFF
5931 @ifset ELF
5932 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
5933 @subheading COFF Version
5934 @end ifset
5935
5936 @cindex @code{section} directive (COFF version)
5937 For COFF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used in one of the following
5938 ways:
5939
5940 @smallexample
5941 .section @var{name}[, "@var{flags}"]
5942 .section @var{name}[, @var{subsection}]
5943 @end smallexample
5944
5945 If the optional argument is quoted, it is taken as flags to use for the
5946 section. Each flag is a single character. The following flags are recognized:
5947 @table @code
5948 @item b
5949 bss section (uninitialized data)
5950 @item n
5951 section is not loaded
5952 @item w
5953 writable section
5954 @item d
5955 data section
5956 @item r
5957 read-only section
5958 @item x
5959 executable section
5960 @item s
5961 shared section (meaningful for PE targets)
5962 @item a
5963 ignored. (For compatibility with the ELF version)
5964 @item y
5965 section is not readable (meaningful for PE targets)
5966 @item 0-9
5967 single-digit power-of-two section alignment (GNU extension)
5968 @end table
5969
5970 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
5971 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to be
5972 loaded and writable. Note the @code{n} and @code{w} flags remove attributes
5973 from the section, rather than adding them, so if they are used on their own it
5974 will be as if no flags had been specified at all.
5975
5976 If the optional argument to the @code{.section} directive is not quoted, it is
5977 taken as a subsection number (@pxref{Sub-Sections}).
5978 @end ifset
5979
5980 @ifset ELF
5981 @ifset COFF
5982 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
5983 @subheading ELF Version
5984 @end ifset
5985
5986 @cindex Section Stack
5987 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
5988 @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), @code{.pushsection}
5989 (@pxref{PushSection}), @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and
5990 @code{.previous} (@pxref{Previous}).
5991
5992 @cindex @code{section} directive (ELF version)
5993 For ELF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used like this:
5994
5995 @smallexample
5996 .section @var{name} [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{flag_specific_arguments}]]]
5997 @end smallexample
5998
5999 The optional @var{flags} argument is a quoted string which may contain any
6000 combination of the following characters:
6001 @table @code
6002 @item a
6003 section is allocatable
6004 @item e
6005 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6006 @item w
6007 section is writable
6008 @item x
6009 section is executable
6010 @item M
6011 section is mergeable
6012 @item S
6013 section contains zero terminated strings
6014 @item G
6015 section is a member of a section group
6016 @item T
6017 section is used for thread-local-storage
6018 @item ?
6019 section is a member of the previously-current section's group, if any
6020 @end table
6021
6022 The optional @var{type} argument may contain one of the following constants:
6023 @table @code
6024 @item @@progbits
6025 section contains data
6026 @item @@nobits
6027 section does not contain data (i.e., section only occupies space)
6028 @item @@note
6029 section contains data which is used by things other than the program
6030 @item @@init_array
6031 section contains an array of pointers to init functions
6032 @item @@fini_array
6033 section contains an array of pointers to finish functions
6034 @item @@preinit_array
6035 section contains an array of pointers to pre-init functions
6036 @end table
6037
6038 Many targets only support the first three section types.
6039
6040 Note on targets where the @code{@@} character is the start of a comment (eg
6041 ARM) then another character is used instead. For example the ARM port uses the
6042 @code{%} character.
6043
6044 If @var{flags} contains the @code{M} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6045 be specified as well as an extra argument---@var{entsize}---like this:
6046
6047 @smallexample
6048 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"M, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}
6049 @end smallexample
6050
6051 Sections with the @code{M} flag but not @code{S} flag must contain fixed size
6052 constants, each @var{entsize} octets long. Sections with both @code{M} and
6053 @code{S} must contain zero terminated strings where each character is
6054 @var{entsize} bytes long. The linker may remove duplicates within sections with
6055 the same name, same entity size and same flags. @var{entsize} must be an
6056 absolute expression. For sections with both @code{M} and @code{S}, a string
6057 which is a suffix of a larger string is considered a duplicate. Thus
6058 @code{"def"} will be merged with @code{"abcdef"}; A reference to the first
6059 @code{"def"} will be changed to a reference to @code{"abcdef"+3}.
6060
6061 If @var{flags} contains the @code{G} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6062 be present along with an additional field like this:
6063
6064 @smallexample
6065 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"G, @@@var{type}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6066 @end smallexample
6067
6068 The @var{GroupName} field specifies the name of the section group to which this
6069 particular section belongs. The optional linkage field can contain:
6070 @table @code
6071 @item comdat
6072 indicates that only one copy of this section should be retained
6073 @item .gnu.linkonce
6074 an alias for comdat
6075 @end table
6076
6077 Note: if both the @var{M} and @var{G} flags are present then the fields for
6078 the Merge flag should come first, like this:
6079
6080 @smallexample
6081 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"MG, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6082 @end smallexample
6083
6084 If @var{flags} contains the @code{?} symbol then it may not also contain the
6085 @code{G} symbol and the @var{GroupName} or @var{linkage} fields should not be
6086 present. Instead, @code{?} says to consider the section that's current before
6087 this directive. If that section used @code{G}, then the new section will use
6088 @code{G} with those same @var{GroupName} and @var{linkage} fields implicitly.
6089 If not, then the @code{?} symbol has no effect.
6090
6091 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6092 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to have
6093 none of the above flags: it will not be allocated in memory, nor writable, nor
6094 executable. The section will contain data.
6095
6096 For ELF targets, the assembler supports another type of @code{.section}
6097 directive for compatibility with the Solaris assembler:
6098
6099 @smallexample
6100 .section "@var{name}"[, @var{flags}...]
6101 @end smallexample
6102
6103 Note that the section name is quoted. There may be a sequence of comma
6104 separated flags:
6105 @table @code
6106 @item #alloc
6107 section is allocatable
6108 @item #write
6109 section is writable
6110 @item #execinstr
6111 section is executable
6112 @item #exclude
6113 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6114 @item #tls
6115 section is used for thread local storage
6116 @end table
6117
6118 This directive replaces the current section and subsection. See the
6119 contents of the gas testsuite directory @code{gas/testsuite/gas/elf} for
6120 some examples of how this directive and the other section stack directives
6121 work.
6122 @end ifset
6123 @end ifset
6124
6125 @node Set
6126 @section @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
6127
6128 @cindex @code{set} directive
6129 @cindex symbol value, setting
6130 Set the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}. This
6131 changes @var{symbol}'s value and type to conform to
6132 @var{expression}. If @var{symbol} was flagged as external, it remains
6133 flagged (@pxref{Symbol Attributes}).
6134
6135 You may @code{.set} a symbol many times in the same assembly.
6136
6137 If you @code{.set} a global symbol, the value stored in the object
6138 file is the last value stored into it.
6139
6140 @ifset Z80
6141 On Z80 @code{set} is a real instruction, use
6142 @samp{@var{symbol} defl @var{expression}} instead.
6143 @end ifset
6144
6145 @node Short
6146 @section @code{.short @var{expressions}}
6147
6148 @cindex @code{short} directive
6149 @ifset GENERIC
6150 @code{.short} is normally the same as @samp{.word}.
6151 @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6152
6153 In some configurations, however, @code{.short} and @code{.word} generate
6154 numbers of different lengths. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6155 @end ifset
6156 @ifclear GENERIC
6157 @ifset W16
6158 @code{.short} is the same as @samp{.word}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6159 @end ifset
6160 @ifset W32
6161 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
6162 a 16 bit number for each.
6163 @end ifset
6164 @end ifclear
6165
6166 @node Single
6167 @section @code{.single @var{flonums}}
6168
6169 @cindex @code{single} directive
6170 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
6171 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
6172 has the same effect as @code{.float}.
6173 @ifset GENERIC
6174 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
6175 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6176 @end ifset
6177 @ifclear GENERIC
6178 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
6179 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.single} emits 32-bit floating point
6180 numbers in @sc{ieee} format.
6181 @end ifset
6182 @end ifclear
6183
6184 @ifset COFF-ELF
6185 @node Size
6186 @section @code{.size}
6187
6188 This directive is used to set the size associated with a symbol.
6189
6190 @ifset COFF
6191 @ifset ELF
6192 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6193 @subheading COFF Version
6194 @end ifset
6195
6196 @cindex @code{size} directive (COFF version)
6197 For COFF targets, the @code{.size} directive is only permitted inside
6198 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6199
6200 @smallexample
6201 .size @var{expression}
6202 @end smallexample
6203
6204 @ifset BOUT
6205 @samp{.size} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
6206 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6207 ignores it.
6208 @end ifset
6209 @end ifset
6210
6211 @ifset ELF
6212 @ifset COFF
6213 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6214 @subheading ELF Version
6215 @end ifset
6216
6217 @cindex @code{size} directive (ELF version)
6218 For ELF targets, the @code{.size} directive is used like this:
6219
6220 @smallexample
6221 .size @var{name} , @var{expression}
6222 @end smallexample
6223
6224 This directive sets the size associated with a symbol @var{name}.
6225 The size in bytes is computed from @var{expression} which can make use of label
6226 arithmetic. This directive is typically used to set the size of function
6227 symbols.
6228 @end ifset
6229 @end ifset
6230
6231 @ifclear no-space-dir
6232 @node Skip
6233 @section @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6234
6235 @cindex @code{skip} directive
6236 @cindex filling memory
6237 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6238 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma and
6239 @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same as
6240 @samp{.space}.
6241 @end ifclear
6242
6243 @node Sleb128
6244 @section @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
6245
6246 @cindex @code{sleb128} directive
6247 @var{sleb128} stands for ``signed little endian base 128.'' This is a
6248 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6249 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Uleb128, ,@code{.uleb128}}.
6250
6251 @ifclear no-space-dir
6252 @node Space
6253 @section @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6254
6255 @cindex @code{space} directive
6256 @cindex filling memory
6257 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6258 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma
6259 and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same
6260 as @samp{.skip}.
6261
6262 @ifset HPPA
6263 @quotation
6264 @emph{Warning:} @code{.space} has a completely different meaning for HPPA
6265 targets; use @code{.block} as a substitute. See @cite{HP9000 Series 800
6266 Assembly Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) for the meaning of the
6267 @code{.space} directive. @xref{HPPA Directives,,HPPA Assembler Directives},
6268 for a summary.
6269 @end quotation
6270 @end ifset
6271 @end ifclear
6272
6273 @ifset have-stabs
6274 @node Stab
6275 @section @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
6276
6277 @cindex symbolic debuggers, information for
6278 @cindex @code{stab@var{x}} directives
6279 There are three directives that begin @samp{.stab}.
6280 All emit symbols (@pxref{Symbols}), for use by symbolic debuggers.
6281 The symbols are not entered in the @command{@value{AS}} hash table: they
6282 cannot be referenced elsewhere in the source file.
6283 Up to five fields are required:
6284
6285 @table @var
6286 @item string
6287 This is the symbol's name. It may contain any character except
6288 @samp{\000}, so is more general than ordinary symbol names. Some
6289 debuggers used to code arbitrarily complex structures into symbol names
6290 using this field.
6291
6292 @item type
6293 An absolute expression. The symbol's type is set to the low 8 bits of
6294 this expression. Any bit pattern is permitted, but @code{@value{LD}}
6295 and debuggers choke on silly bit patterns.
6296
6297 @item other
6298 An absolute expression. The symbol's ``other'' attribute is set to the
6299 low 8 bits of this expression.
6300
6301 @item desc
6302 An absolute expression. The symbol's descriptor is set to the low 16
6303 bits of this expression.
6304
6305 @item value
6306 An absolute expression which becomes the symbol's value.
6307 @end table
6308
6309 If a warning is detected while reading a @code{.stabd}, @code{.stabn},
6310 or @code{.stabs} statement, the symbol has probably already been created;
6311 you get a half-formed symbol in your object file. This is
6312 compatible with earlier assemblers!
6313
6314 @table @code
6315 @cindex @code{stabd} directive
6316 @item .stabd @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc}
6317
6318 The ``name'' of the symbol generated is not even an empty string.
6319 It is a null pointer, for compatibility. Older assemblers used a
6320 null pointer so they didn't waste space in object files with empty
6321 strings.
6322
6323 The symbol's value is set to the location counter,
6324 relocatably. When your program is linked, the value of this symbol
6325 is the address of the location counter when the @code{.stabd} was
6326 assembled.
6327
6328 @cindex @code{stabn} directive
6329 @item .stabn @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6330 The name of the symbol is set to the empty string @code{""}.
6331
6332 @cindex @code{stabs} directive
6333 @item .stabs @var{string} , @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6334 All five fields are specified.
6335 @end table
6336 @end ifset
6337 @c end have-stabs
6338
6339 @node String
6340 @section @code{.string} "@var{str}", @code{.string8} "@var{str}", @code{.string16}
6341 "@var{str}", @code{.string32} "@var{str}", @code{.string64} "@var{str}"
6342
6343 @cindex string, copying to object file
6344 @cindex string8, copying to object file
6345 @cindex string16, copying to object file
6346 @cindex string32, copying to object file
6347 @cindex string64, copying to object file
6348 @cindex @code{string} directive
6349 @cindex @code{string8} directive
6350 @cindex @code{string16} directive
6351 @cindex @code{string32} directive
6352 @cindex @code{string64} directive
6353
6354 Copy the characters in @var{str} to the object file. You may specify more than
6355 one string to copy, separated by commas. Unless otherwise specified for a
6356 particular machine, the assembler marks the end of each string with a 0 byte.
6357 You can use any of the escape sequences described in @ref{Strings,,Strings}.
6358
6359 The variants @code{string16}, @code{string32} and @code{string64} differ from
6360 the @code{string} pseudo opcode in that each 8-bit character from @var{str} is
6361 copied and expanded to 16, 32 or 64 bits respectively. The expanded characters
6362 are stored in target endianness byte order.
6363
6364 Example:
6365 @smallexample
6366 .string32 "BYE"
6367 expands to:
6368 .string "B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E\0\0\0" /* On little endian targets. */
6369 .string "\0\0\0B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E" /* On big endian targets. */
6370 @end smallexample
6371
6372
6373 @node Struct
6374 @section @code{.struct @var{expression}}
6375
6376 @cindex @code{struct} directive
6377 Switch to the absolute section, and set the section offset to @var{expression},
6378 which must be an absolute expression. You might use this as follows:
6379 @smallexample
6380 .struct 0
6381 field1:
6382 .struct field1 + 4
6383 field2:
6384 .struct field2 + 4
6385 field3:
6386 @end smallexample
6387 This would define the symbol @code{field1} to have the value 0, the symbol
6388 @code{field2} to have the value 4, and the symbol @code{field3} to have the
6389 value 8. Assembly would be left in the absolute section, and you would need to
6390 use a @code{.section} directive of some sort to change to some other section
6391 before further assembly.
6392
6393 @ifset ELF
6394 @node SubSection
6395 @section @code{.subsection @var{name}}
6396
6397 @cindex @code{subsection} directive
6398 @cindex Section Stack
6399 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6400 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}),
6401 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6402 (@pxref{Previous}).
6403
6404 This directive replaces the current subsection with @code{name}. The current
6405 section is not changed. The replaced subsection is put onto the section stack
6406 in place of the then current top of stack subsection.
6407 @end ifset
6408
6409 @ifset ELF
6410 @node Symver
6411 @section @code{.symver}
6412 @cindex @code{symver} directive
6413 @cindex symbol versioning
6414 @cindex versions of symbols
6415 Use the @code{.symver} directive to bind symbols to specific version nodes
6416 within a source file. This is only supported on ELF platforms, and is
6417 typically used when assembling files to be linked into a shared library.
6418 There are cases where it may make sense to use this in objects to be bound
6419 into an application itself so as to override a versioned symbol from a
6420 shared library.
6421
6422 For ELF targets, the @code{.symver} directive can be used like this:
6423 @smallexample
6424 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@nodename}
6425 @end smallexample
6426 If the symbol @var{name} is defined within the file
6427 being assembled, the @code{.symver} directive effectively creates a symbol
6428 alias with the name @var{name2@@nodename}, and in fact the main reason that we
6429 just don't try and create a regular alias is that the @var{@@} character isn't
6430 permitted in symbol names. The @var{name2} part of the name is the actual name
6431 of the symbol by which it will be externally referenced. The name @var{name}
6432 itself is merely a name of convenience that is used so that it is possible to
6433 have definitions for multiple versions of a function within a single source
6434 file, and so that the compiler can unambiguously know which version of a
6435 function is being mentioned. The @var{nodename} portion of the alias should be
6436 the name of a node specified in the version script supplied to the linker when
6437 building a shared library. If you are attempting to override a versioned
6438 symbol from a shared library, then @var{nodename} should correspond to the
6439 nodename of the symbol you are trying to override.
6440
6441 If the symbol @var{name} is not defined within the file being assembled, all
6442 references to @var{name} will be changed to @var{name2@@nodename}. If no
6443 reference to @var{name} is made, @var{name2@@nodename} will be removed from the
6444 symbol table.
6445
6446 Another usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6447 @smallexample
6448 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@nodename}
6449 @end smallexample
6450 In this case, the symbol @var{name} must exist and be defined within
6451 the file being assembled. It is similar to @var{name2@@nodename}. The
6452 difference is @var{name2@@@@nodename} will also be used to resolve
6453 references to @var{name2} by the linker.
6454
6455 The third usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6456 @smallexample
6457 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@@@nodename}
6458 @end smallexample
6459 When @var{name} is not defined within the
6460 file being assembled, it is treated as @var{name2@@nodename}. When
6461 @var{name} is defined within the file being assembled, the symbol
6462 name, @var{name}, will be changed to @var{name2@@@@nodename}.
6463 @end ifset
6464
6465 @ifset COFF
6466 @node Tag
6467 @section @code{.tag @var{structname}}
6468
6469 @cindex COFF structure debugging
6470 @cindex structure debugging, COFF
6471 @cindex @code{tag} directive
6472 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
6473 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
6474 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. Tags are used to link structure
6475 definitions in the symbol table with instances of those structures.
6476 @ifset BOUT
6477
6478 @samp{.tag} is only used when generating COFF format output; when
6479 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6480 ignores it.
6481 @end ifset
6482 @end ifset
6483
6484 @node Text
6485 @section @code{.text @var{subsection}}
6486
6487 @cindex @code{text} directive
6488 Tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the end of
6489 the text subsection numbered @var{subsection}, which is an absolute
6490 expression. If @var{subsection} is omitted, subsection number zero
6491 is used.
6492
6493 @node Title
6494 @section @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
6495
6496 @cindex @code{title} directive
6497 @cindex listing control: title line
6498 Use @var{heading} as the title (second line, immediately after the
6499 source file name and pagenumber) when generating assembly listings.
6500
6501 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6502 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6503
6504 @ifset COFF-ELF
6505 @node Type
6506 @section @code{.type}
6507
6508 This directive is used to set the type of a symbol.
6509
6510 @ifset COFF
6511 @ifset ELF
6512 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6513 @subheading COFF Version
6514 @end ifset
6515
6516 @cindex COFF symbol type
6517 @cindex symbol type, COFF
6518 @cindex @code{type} directive (COFF version)
6519 For COFF targets, this directive is permitted only within
6520 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6521
6522 @smallexample
6523 .type @var{int}
6524 @end smallexample
6525
6526 This records the integer @var{int} as the type attribute of a symbol table
6527 entry.
6528
6529 @ifset BOUT
6530 @samp{.type} is associated only with COFF format output; when
6531 @command{@value{AS}} is configured for @code{b.out} output, it accepts this
6532 directive but ignores it.
6533 @end ifset
6534 @end ifset
6535
6536 @ifset ELF
6537 @ifset COFF
6538 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6539 @subheading ELF Version
6540 @end ifset
6541
6542 @cindex ELF symbol type
6543 @cindex symbol type, ELF
6544 @cindex @code{type} directive (ELF version)
6545 For ELF targets, the @code{.type} directive is used like this:
6546
6547 @smallexample
6548 .type @var{name} , @var{type description}
6549 @end smallexample
6550
6551 This sets the type of symbol @var{name} to be either a
6552 function symbol or an object symbol. There are five different syntaxes
6553 supported for the @var{type description} field, in order to provide
6554 compatibility with various other assemblers.
6555
6556 Because some of the characters used in these syntaxes (such as @samp{@@} and
6557 @samp{#}) are comment characters for some architectures, some of the syntaxes
6558 below do not work on all architectures. The first variant will be accepted by
6559 the GNU assembler on all architectures so that variant should be used for
6560 maximum portability, if you do not need to assemble your code with other
6561 assemblers.
6562
6563 The syntaxes supported are:
6564
6565 @smallexample
6566 .type <name> STT_<TYPE_IN_UPPER_CASE>
6567 .type <name>,#<type>
6568 .type <name>,@@<type>
6569 .type <name>,%<type>
6570 .type <name>,"<type>"
6571 @end smallexample
6572
6573 The types supported are:
6574
6575 @table @gcctabopt
6576 @item STT_FUNC
6577 @itemx function
6578 Mark the symbol as being a function name.
6579
6580 @item STT_GNU_IFUNC
6581 @itemx gnu_indirect_function
6582 Mark the symbol as an indirect function when evaluated during reloc
6583 processing. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU systems).
6584
6585 @item STT_OBJECT
6586 @itemx object
6587 Mark the symbol as being a data object.
6588
6589 @item STT_TLS
6590 @itemx tls_object
6591 Mark the symbol as being a thead-local data object.
6592
6593 @item STT_COMMON
6594 @itemx common
6595 Mark the symbol as being a common data object.
6596
6597 @item STT_NOTYPE
6598 @itemx notype
6599 Does not mark the symbol in any way. It is supported just for completeness.
6600
6601 @item gnu_unique_object
6602 Marks the symbol as being a globally unique data object. The dynamic linker
6603 will make sure that in the entire process there is just one symbol with this
6604 name and type in use. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU
6605 systems).
6606
6607 @end table
6608
6609 Note: Some targets support extra types in addition to those listed above.
6610
6611 @end ifset
6612 @end ifset
6613
6614 @node Uleb128
6615 @section @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
6616
6617 @cindex @code{uleb128} directive
6618 @var{uleb128} stands for ``unsigned little endian base 128.'' This is a
6619 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6620 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Sleb128, ,@code{.sleb128}}.
6621
6622 @ifset COFF
6623 @node Val
6624 @section @code{.val @var{addr}}
6625
6626 @cindex @code{val} directive
6627 @cindex COFF value attribute
6628 @cindex value attribute, COFF
6629 This directive, permitted only within @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs,
6630 records the address @var{addr} as the value attribute of a symbol table
6631 entry.
6632 @ifset BOUT
6633
6634 @samp{.val} is used only for COFF output; when @command{@value{AS}} is
6635 configured for @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but ignores it.
6636 @end ifset
6637 @end ifset
6638
6639 @ifset ELF
6640 @node Version
6641 @section @code{.version "@var{string}"}
6642
6643 @cindex @code{version} directive
6644 This directive creates a @code{.note} section and places into it an ELF
6645 formatted note of type NT_VERSION. The note's name is set to @code{string}.
6646 @end ifset
6647
6648 @ifset ELF
6649 @node VTableEntry
6650 @section @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
6651
6652 @cindex @code{vtable_entry} directive
6653 This directive finds or creates a symbol @code{table} and creates a
6654 @code{VTABLE_ENTRY} relocation for it with an addend of @code{offset}.
6655
6656 @node VTableInherit
6657 @section @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
6658
6659 @cindex @code{vtable_inherit} directive
6660 This directive finds the symbol @code{child} and finds or creates the symbol
6661 @code{parent} and then creates a @code{VTABLE_INHERIT} relocation for the
6662 parent whose addend is the value of the child symbol. As a special case the
6663 parent name of @code{0} is treated as referring to the @code{*ABS*} section.
6664 @end ifset
6665
6666 @node Warning
6667 @section @code{.warning "@var{string}"}
6668 @cindex warning directive
6669 Similar to the directive @code{.error}
6670 (@pxref{Error,,@code{.error "@var{string}"}}), but just emits a warning.
6671
6672 @node Weak
6673 @section @code{.weak @var{names}}
6674
6675 @cindex @code{weak} directive
6676 This directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
6677 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
6678
6679 On COFF targets other than PE, weak symbols are a GNU extension. This
6680 directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
6681 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
6682
6683 On the PE target, weak symbols are supported natively as weak aliases.
6684 When a weak symbol is created that is not an alias, GAS creates an
6685 alternate symbol to hold the default value.
6686
6687 @node Weakref
6688 @section @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{target}}
6689
6690 @cindex @code{weakref} directive
6691 This directive creates an alias to the target symbol that enables the symbol to
6692 be referenced with weak-symbol semantics, but without actually making it weak.
6693 If direct references or definitions of the symbol are present, then the symbol
6694 will not be weak, but if all references to it are through weak references, the
6695 symbol will be marked as weak in the symbol table.
6696
6697 The effect is equivalent to moving all references to the alias to a separate
6698 assembly source file, renaming the alias to the symbol in it, declaring the
6699 symbol as weak there, and running a reloadable link to merge the object files
6700 resulting from the assembly of the new source file and the old source file that
6701 had the references to the alias removed.
6702
6703 The alias itself never makes to the symbol table, and is entirely handled
6704 within the assembler.
6705
6706 @node Word
6707 @section @code{.word @var{expressions}}
6708
6709 @cindex @code{word} directive
6710 This directive expects zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section,
6711 separated by commas.
6712 @ifclear GENERIC
6713 @ifset W32
6714 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 32-bit number.
6715 @end ifset
6716 @ifset W16
6717 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 16-bit number.
6718 @end ifset
6719 @end ifclear
6720 @ifset GENERIC
6721
6722 The size of the number emitted, and its byte order,
6723 depend on what target computer the assembly is for.
6724 @end ifset
6725
6726 @c on amd29k, i960, sparc the "special treatment to support compilers" doesn't
6727 @c happen---32-bit addressability, period; no long/short jumps.
6728 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
6729 @cindex difference tables altered
6730 @cindex altered difference tables
6731 @quotation
6732 @emph{Warning: Special Treatment to support Compilers}
6733 @end quotation
6734
6735 @ifset GENERIC
6736 Machines with a 32-bit address space, but that do less than 32-bit
6737 addressing, require the following special treatment. If the machine of
6738 interest to you does 32-bit addressing (or doesn't require it;
6739 @pxref{Machine Dependencies}), you can ignore this issue.
6740
6741 @end ifset
6742 In order to assemble compiler output into something that works,
6743 @command{@value{AS}} occasionally does strange things to @samp{.word} directives.
6744 Directives of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2} are often emitted by
6745 compilers as part of jump tables. Therefore, when @command{@value{AS}} assembles a
6746 directive of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2}, and the difference between
6747 @code{sym1} and @code{sym2} does not fit in 16 bits, @command{@value{AS}}
6748 creates a @dfn{secondary jump table}, immediately before the next label.
6749 This secondary jump table is preceded by a short-jump to the
6750 first byte after the secondary table. This short-jump prevents the flow
6751 of control from accidentally falling into the new table. Inside the
6752 table is a long-jump to @code{sym2}. The original @samp{.word}
6753 contains @code{sym1} minus the address of the long-jump to
6754 @code{sym2}.
6755
6756 If there were several occurrences of @samp{.word sym1-sym2} before the
6757 secondary jump table, all of them are adjusted. If there was a
6758 @samp{.word sym3-sym4}, that also did not fit in sixteen bits, a
6759 long-jump to @code{sym4} is included in the secondary jump table,
6760 and the @code{.word} directives are adjusted to contain @code{sym3}
6761 minus the address of the long-jump to @code{sym4}; and so on, for as many
6762 entries in the original jump table as necessary.
6763
6764 @ifset INTERNALS
6765 @emph{This feature may be disabled by compiling @command{@value{AS}} with the
6766 @samp{-DWORKING_DOT_WORD} option.} This feature is likely to confuse
6767 assembly language programmers.
6768 @end ifset
6769 @end ifset
6770 @c end DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
6771
6772 @node Deprecated
6773 @section Deprecated Directives
6774
6775 @cindex deprecated directives
6776 @cindex obsolescent directives
6777 One day these directives won't work.
6778 They are included for compatibility with older assemblers.
6779 @table @t
6780 @item .abort
6781 @item .line
6782 @end table
6783
6784 @ifset ELF
6785 @node Object Attributes
6786 @chapter Object Attributes
6787 @cindex object attributes
6788
6789 @command{@value{AS}} assembles source files written for a specific architecture
6790 into object files for that architecture. But not all object files are alike.
6791 Many architectures support incompatible variations. For instance, floating
6792 point arguments might be passed in floating point registers if the object file
6793 requires hardware floating point support---or floating point arguments might be
6794 passed in integer registers if the object file supports processors with no
6795 hardware floating point unit. Or, if two objects are built for different
6796 generations of the same architecture, the combination may require the
6797 newer generation at run-time.
6798
6799 This information is useful during and after linking. At link time,
6800 @command{@value{LD}} can warn about incompatible object files. After link
6801 time, tools like @command{gdb} can use it to process the linked file
6802 correctly.
6803
6804 Compatibility information is recorded as a series of object attributes. Each
6805 attribute has a @dfn{vendor}, @dfn{tag}, and @dfn{value}. The vendor is a
6806 string, and indicates who sets the meaning of the tag. The tag is an integer,
6807 and indicates what property the attribute describes. The value may be a string
6808 or an integer, and indicates how the property affects this object. Missing
6809 attributes are the same as attributes with a zero value or empty string value.
6810
6811 Object attributes were developed as part of the ABI for the ARM Architecture.
6812 The file format is documented in @cite{ELF for the ARM Architecture}.
6813
6814 @menu
6815 * GNU Object Attributes:: @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
6816 * Defining New Object Attributes:: Defining New Object Attributes
6817 @end menu
6818
6819 @node GNU Object Attributes
6820 @section @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
6821
6822 The @code{.gnu_attribute} directive records an object attribute
6823 with vendor @samp{gnu}.
6824
6825 Except for @samp{Tag_compatibility}, which has both an integer and a string for
6826 its value, @sc{gnu} attributes have a string value if the tag number is odd and
6827 an integer value if the tag number is even. The second bit (@code{@var{tag} &
6828 2} is set for architecture-independent attributes and clear for
6829 architecture-dependent ones.
6830
6831 @subsection Common @sc{gnu} attributes
6832
6833 These attributes are valid on all architectures.
6834
6835 @table @r
6836 @item Tag_compatibility (32)
6837 The compatibility attribute takes an integer flag value and a vendor name. If
6838 the flag value is 0, the file is compatible with other toolchains. If it is 1,
6839 then the file is only compatible with the named toolchain. If it is greater
6840 than 1, the file can only be processed by other toolchains under some private
6841 arrangement indicated by the flag value and the vendor name.
6842 @end table
6843
6844 @subsection MIPS Attributes
6845
6846 @table @r
6847 @item Tag_GNU_MIPS_ABI_FP (4)
6848 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
6849
6850 @itemize @bullet
6851 @item
6852 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
6853 @item
6854 1 for files using the hardware floating-point with a standard double-precision
6855 FPU.
6856 @item
6857 2 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a single-precision FPU.
6858 @item
6859 3 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
6860 @item
6861 4 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit wide
6862 double-precision floating-point registers and 32-bit wide general
6863 purpose registers.
6864 @end itemize
6865 @end table
6866
6867 @subsection PowerPC Attributes
6868
6869 @table @r
6870 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_FP (4)
6871 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
6872
6873 @itemize @bullet
6874 @item
6875 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
6876 @item
6877 1 for files using double-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
6878 @item
6879 2 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
6880 @item
6881 3 for files using single-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
6882 @end itemize
6883
6884 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_Vector (8)
6885 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
6886
6887 @itemize @bullet
6888 @item
6889 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
6890 @item
6891 1 for files using general purpose registers to pass vectors.
6892 @item
6893 2 for files using AltiVec registers to pass vectors.
6894 @item
6895 3 for files using SPE registers to pass vectors.
6896 @end itemize
6897 @end table
6898
6899 @node Defining New Object Attributes
6900 @section Defining New Object Attributes
6901
6902 If you want to define a new @sc{gnu} object attribute, here are the places you
6903 will need to modify. New attributes should be discussed on the @samp{binutils}
6904 mailing list.
6905
6906 @itemize @bullet
6907 @item
6908 This manual, which is the official register of attributes.
6909 @item
6910 The header for your architecture @file{include/elf}, to define the tag.
6911 @item
6912 The @file{bfd} support file for your architecture, to merge the attribute
6913 and issue any appropriate link warnings.
6914 @item
6915 Test cases in @file{ld/testsuite} for merging and link warnings.
6916 @item
6917 @file{binutils/readelf.c} to display your attribute.
6918 @item
6919 GCC, if you want the compiler to mark the attribute automatically.
6920 @end itemize
6921
6922 @end ifset
6923
6924 @ifset GENERIC
6925 @node Machine Dependencies
6926 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
6927
6928 @cindex machine dependencies
6929 The machine instruction sets are (almost by definition) different on
6930 each machine where @command{@value{AS}} runs. Floating point representations
6931 vary as well, and @command{@value{AS}} often supports a few additional
6932 directives or command-line options for compatibility with other
6933 assemblers on a particular platform. Finally, some versions of
6934 @command{@value{AS}} support special pseudo-instructions for branch
6935 optimization.
6936
6937 This chapter discusses most of these differences, though it does not
6938 include details on any machine's instruction set. For details on that
6939 subject, see the hardware manufacturer's manual.
6940
6941 @menu
6942 @ifset AARCH64
6943 * AArch64-Dependent:: AArch64 Dependent Features
6944 @end ifset
6945 @ifset ALPHA
6946 * Alpha-Dependent:: Alpha Dependent Features
6947 @end ifset
6948 @ifset ARC
6949 * ARC-Dependent:: ARC Dependent Features
6950 @end ifset
6951 @ifset ARM
6952 * ARM-Dependent:: ARM Dependent Features
6953 @end ifset
6954 @ifset AVR
6955 * AVR-Dependent:: AVR Dependent Features
6956 @end ifset
6957 @ifset Blackfin
6958 * Blackfin-Dependent:: Blackfin Dependent Features
6959 @end ifset
6960 @ifset CR16
6961 * CR16-Dependent:: CR16 Dependent Features
6962 @end ifset
6963 @ifset CRIS
6964 * CRIS-Dependent:: CRIS Dependent Features
6965 @end ifset
6966 @ifset D10V
6967 * D10V-Dependent:: D10V Dependent Features
6968 @end ifset
6969 @ifset D30V
6970 * D30V-Dependent:: D30V Dependent Features
6971 @end ifset
6972 @ifset EPIPHANY
6973 * Epiphany-Dependent:: EPIPHANY Dependent Features
6974 @end ifset
6975 @ifset H8/300
6976 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
6977 @end ifset
6978 @ifset HPPA
6979 * HPPA-Dependent:: HPPA Dependent Features
6980 @end ifset
6981 @ifset I370
6982 * ESA/390-Dependent:: IBM ESA/390 Dependent Features
6983 @end ifset
6984 @ifset I80386
6985 * i386-Dependent:: Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 Dependent Features
6986 @end ifset
6987 @ifset I860
6988 * i860-Dependent:: Intel 80860 Dependent Features
6989 @end ifset
6990 @ifset I960
6991 * i960-Dependent:: Intel 80960 Dependent Features
6992 @end ifset
6993 @ifset IA64
6994 * IA-64-Dependent:: Intel IA-64 Dependent Features
6995 @end ifset
6996 @ifset IP2K
6997 * IP2K-Dependent:: IP2K Dependent Features
6998 @end ifset
6999 @ifset LM32
7000 * LM32-Dependent:: LM32 Dependent Features
7001 @end ifset
7002 @ifset M32C
7003 * M32C-Dependent:: M32C Dependent Features
7004 @end ifset
7005 @ifset M32R
7006 * M32R-Dependent:: M32R Dependent Features
7007 @end ifset
7008 @ifset M680X0
7009 * M68K-Dependent:: M680x0 Dependent Features
7010 @end ifset
7011 @ifset M68HC11
7012 * M68HC11-Dependent:: M68HC11 and 68HC12 Dependent Features
7013 @end ifset
7014 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7015 * MicroBlaze-Dependent:: MICROBLAZE Dependent Features
7016 @end ifset
7017 @ifset MIPS
7018 * MIPS-Dependent:: MIPS Dependent Features
7019 @end ifset
7020 @ifset MMIX
7021 * MMIX-Dependent:: MMIX Dependent Features
7022 @end ifset
7023 @ifset MSP430
7024 * MSP430-Dependent:: MSP430 Dependent Features
7025 @end ifset
7026 @ifset NS32K
7027 * NS32K-Dependent:: NS32K Dependent Features
7028 @end ifset
7029 @ifset SH
7030 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas / SuperH SH Dependent Features
7031 * SH64-Dependent:: SuperH SH64 Dependent Features
7032 @end ifset
7033 @ifset PDP11
7034 * PDP-11-Dependent:: PDP-11 Dependent Features
7035 @end ifset
7036 @ifset PJ
7037 * PJ-Dependent:: picoJava Dependent Features
7038 @end ifset
7039 @ifset PPC
7040 * PPC-Dependent:: PowerPC Dependent Features
7041 @end ifset
7042 @ifset RL78
7043 * RL78-Dependent:: RL78 Dependent Features
7044 @end ifset
7045 @ifset RX
7046 * RX-Dependent:: RX Dependent Features
7047 @end ifset
7048 @ifset S390
7049 * S/390-Dependent:: IBM S/390 Dependent Features
7050 @end ifset
7051 @ifset SCORE
7052 * SCORE-Dependent:: SCORE Dependent Features
7053 @end ifset
7054 @ifset SPARC
7055 * Sparc-Dependent:: SPARC Dependent Features
7056 @end ifset
7057 @ifset TIC54X
7058 * TIC54X-Dependent:: TI TMS320C54x Dependent Features
7059 @end ifset
7060 @ifset TIC6X
7061 * TIC6X-Dependent :: TI TMS320C6x Dependent Features
7062 @end ifset
7063 @ifset TILEGX
7064 * TILE-Gx-Dependent :: Tilera TILE-Gx Dependent Features
7065 @end ifset
7066 @ifset TILEPRO
7067 * TILEPro-Dependent :: Tilera TILEPro Dependent Features
7068 @end ifset
7069 @ifset V850
7070 * V850-Dependent:: V850 Dependent Features
7071 @end ifset
7072 @ifset XGATE
7073 * XGATE-Dependent:: XGATE Features
7074 @end ifset
7075 @ifset XSTORMY16
7076 * XSTORMY16-Dependent:: XStormy16 Dependent Features
7077 @end ifset
7078 @ifset XTENSA
7079 * Xtensa-Dependent:: Xtensa Dependent Features
7080 @end ifset
7081 @ifset Z80
7082 * Z80-Dependent:: Z80 Dependent Features
7083 @end ifset
7084 @ifset Z8000
7085 * Z8000-Dependent:: Z8000 Dependent Features
7086 @end ifset
7087 @ifset VAX
7088 * Vax-Dependent:: VAX Dependent Features
7089 @end ifset
7090 @end menu
7091
7092 @lowersections
7093 @end ifset
7094
7095 @c The following major nodes are *sections* in the GENERIC version, *chapters*
7096 @c in single-cpu versions. This is mainly achieved by @lowersections. There is a
7097 @c peculiarity: to preserve cross-references, there must be a node called
7098 @c "Machine Dependencies". Hence the conditional nodenames in each
7099 @c major node below. Node defaulting in makeinfo requires adjacency of
7100 @c node and sectioning commands; hence the repetition of @chapter BLAH
7101 @c in both conditional blocks.
7102
7103 @ifset AARCH64
7104 @include c-aarch64.texi
7105 @end ifset
7106
7107 @ifset ALPHA
7108 @include c-alpha.texi
7109 @end ifset
7110
7111 @ifset ARC
7112 @include c-arc.texi
7113 @end ifset
7114
7115 @ifset ARM
7116 @include c-arm.texi
7117 @end ifset
7118
7119 @ifset AVR
7120 @include c-avr.texi
7121 @end ifset
7122
7123 @ifset Blackfin
7124 @include c-bfin.texi
7125 @end ifset
7126
7127 @ifset CR16
7128 @include c-cr16.texi
7129 @end ifset
7130
7131 @ifset CRIS
7132 @include c-cris.texi
7133 @end ifset
7134
7135 @ifset Renesas-all
7136 @ifclear GENERIC
7137 @node Machine Dependencies
7138 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7139
7140 The machine instruction sets are different on each Renesas chip family,
7141 and there are also some syntax differences among the families. This
7142 chapter describes the specific @command{@value{AS}} features for each
7143 family.
7144
7145 @menu
7146 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7147 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas SH Dependent Features
7148 @end menu
7149 @lowersections
7150 @end ifclear
7151 @end ifset
7152
7153 @ifset D10V
7154 @include c-d10v.texi
7155 @end ifset
7156
7157 @ifset D30V
7158 @include c-d30v.texi
7159 @end ifset
7160
7161 @ifset EPIPHANY
7162 @include c-epiphany.texi
7163 @end ifset
7164
7165 @ifset H8/300
7166 @include c-h8300.texi
7167 @end ifset
7168
7169 @ifset HPPA
7170 @include c-hppa.texi
7171 @end ifset
7172
7173 @ifset I370
7174 @include c-i370.texi
7175 @end ifset
7176
7177 @ifset I80386
7178 @include c-i386.texi
7179 @end ifset
7180
7181 @ifset I860
7182 @include c-i860.texi
7183 @end ifset
7184
7185 @ifset I960
7186 @include c-i960.texi
7187 @end ifset
7188
7189 @ifset IA64
7190 @include c-ia64.texi
7191 @end ifset
7192
7193 @ifset IP2K
7194 @include c-ip2k.texi
7195 @end ifset
7196
7197 @ifset LM32
7198 @include c-lm32.texi
7199 @end ifset
7200
7201 @ifset M32C
7202 @include c-m32c.texi
7203 @end ifset
7204
7205 @ifset M32R
7206 @include c-m32r.texi
7207 @end ifset
7208
7209 @ifset M680X0
7210 @include c-m68k.texi
7211 @end ifset
7212
7213 @ifset M68HC11
7214 @include c-m68hc11.texi
7215 @end ifset
7216
7217 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7218 @include c-microblaze.texi
7219 @end ifset
7220
7221 @ifset MIPS
7222 @include c-mips.texi
7223 @end ifset
7224
7225 @ifset MMIX
7226 @include c-mmix.texi
7227 @end ifset
7228
7229 @ifset MSP430
7230 @include c-msp430.texi
7231 @end ifset
7232
7233 @ifset NS32K
7234 @include c-ns32k.texi
7235 @end ifset
7236
7237 @ifset PDP11
7238 @include c-pdp11.texi
7239 @end ifset
7240
7241 @ifset PJ
7242 @include c-pj.texi
7243 @end ifset
7244
7245 @ifset PPC
7246 @include c-ppc.texi
7247 @end ifset
7248
7249 @ifset RL78
7250 @include c-rl78.texi
7251 @end ifset
7252
7253 @ifset RX
7254 @include c-rx.texi
7255 @end ifset
7256
7257 @ifset S390
7258 @include c-s390.texi
7259 @end ifset
7260
7261 @ifset SCORE
7262 @include c-score.texi
7263 @end ifset
7264
7265 @ifset SH
7266 @include c-sh.texi
7267 @include c-sh64.texi
7268 @end ifset
7269
7270 @ifset SPARC
7271 @include c-sparc.texi
7272 @end ifset
7273
7274 @ifset TIC54X
7275 @include c-tic54x.texi
7276 @end ifset
7277
7278 @ifset TIC6X
7279 @include c-tic6x.texi
7280 @end ifset
7281
7282 @ifset TILEGX
7283 @include c-tilegx.texi
7284 @end ifset
7285
7286 @ifset TILEPRO
7287 @include c-tilepro.texi
7288 @end ifset
7289
7290 @ifset Z80
7291 @include c-z80.texi
7292 @end ifset
7293
7294 @ifset Z8000
7295 @include c-z8k.texi
7296 @end ifset
7297
7298 @ifset VAX
7299 @include c-vax.texi
7300 @end ifset
7301
7302 @ifset V850
7303 @include c-v850.texi
7304 @end ifset
7305
7306 @ifset XGATE
7307 @include c-xgate.texi
7308 @end ifset
7309
7310 @ifset XSTORMY16
7311 @include c-xstormy16.texi
7312 @end ifset
7313
7314 @ifset XTENSA
7315 @include c-xtensa.texi
7316 @end ifset
7317
7318 @ifset GENERIC
7319 @c reverse effect of @down at top of generic Machine-Dep chapter
7320 @raisesections
7321 @end ifset
7322
7323 @node Reporting Bugs
7324 @chapter Reporting Bugs
7325 @cindex bugs in assembler
7326 @cindex reporting bugs in assembler
7327
7328 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{@value{AS}} reliable.
7329
7330 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it may
7331 not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help the
7332 entire community by making the next version of @command{@value{AS}} work better.
7333 Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @command{@value{AS}}.
7334
7335 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7336 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7337
7338 @menu
7339 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7340 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7341 @end menu
7342
7343 @node Bug Criteria
7344 @section Have You Found a Bug?
7345 @cindex bug criteria
7346
7347 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7348
7349 @itemize @bullet
7350 @cindex fatal signal
7351 @cindex assembler crash
7352 @cindex crash of assembler
7353 @item
7354 If the assembler gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7355 @command{@value{AS}} bug. Reliable assemblers never crash.
7356
7357 @cindex error on valid input
7358 @item
7359 If @command{@value{AS}} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7360
7361 @cindex invalid input
7362 @item
7363 If @command{@value{AS}} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7364 is a bug. However, you should note that your idea of ``invalid input'' might
7365 be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support for traditional practice''.
7366
7367 @item
7368 If you are an experienced user of assemblers, your suggestions for improvement
7369 of @command{@value{AS}} are welcome in any case.
7370 @end itemize
7371
7372 @node Bug Reporting
7373 @section How to Report Bugs
7374 @cindex bug reports
7375 @cindex assembler bugs, reporting
7376
7377 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu} products. If
7378 you obtained @command{@value{AS}} from a support organization, we recommend you
7379 contact that organization first.
7380
7381 You can find contact information for many support companies and
7382 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7383 distribution.
7384
7385 @ifset BUGURL
7386 In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @command{@value{AS}}
7387 to @value{BUGURL}.
7388 @end ifset
7389
7390 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7391 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7392 fact or leave it out, state it!
7393
7394 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the problem
7395 and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might assume that the
7396 name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter. Well, probably it does
7397 not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is a stray memory reference which
7398 happens to fetch from the location where that name is stored in memory;
7399 perhaps, if the name were different, the contents of that location would fool
7400 the assembler into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and
7401 give a specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
7402 and the most helpful.
7403
7404 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the bug if
7405 it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports on the assumption
7406 that the bug has not been reported previously.
7407
7408 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7409 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7410 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7411 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
7412
7413 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7414
7415 @itemize @bullet
7416 @item
7417 The version of @command{@value{AS}}. @command{@value{AS}} announces it if you start
7418 it with the @samp{--version} argument.
7419
7420 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7421 the bug in the current version of @command{@value{AS}}.
7422
7423 @item
7424 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{@value{AS}} source.
7425
7426 @item
7427 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7428 version number.
7429
7430 @item
7431 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{@value{AS}}---e.g.
7432 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7433
7434 @item
7435 The command arguments you gave the assembler to assemble your example and
7436 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important, list them
7437 all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
7438
7439 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7440 and then we might not encounter the bug.
7441
7442 @item
7443 A complete input file that will reproduce the bug. If the bug is observed when
7444 the assembler is invoked via a compiler, send the assembler source, not the
7445 high level language source. Most compilers will produce the assembler source
7446 when run with the @samp{-S} option. If you are using @code{@value{GCC}}, use
7447 the options @samp{-v --save-temps}; this will save the assembler source in a
7448 file with an extension of @file{.s}, and also show you exactly how
7449 @command{@value{AS}} is being run.
7450
7451 @item
7452 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7453 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7454
7455 Of course, if the bug is that @command{@value{AS}} gets a fatal signal, then we
7456 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
7457 notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us a chance to
7458 make a mistake.
7459
7460 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still say so
7461 explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your copy of
7462 @command{@value{AS}} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the C
7463 library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash and ours
7464 would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours fails to crash, we
7465 would know that the bug was not happening for us. If you had not told us to
7466 expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
7467 observations.
7468
7469 @item
7470 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{@value{AS}} source, send us context
7471 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or @samp{-p}
7472 option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file. If you even
7473 discuss something in the @command{@value{AS}} source, refer to it by context, not
7474 by line number.
7475
7476 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7477 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7478 @end itemize
7479
7480 Here are some things that are not necessary:
7481
7482 @itemize @bullet
7483 @item
7484 A description of the envelope of the bug.
7485
7486 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7487 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7488 changes will not affect it.
7489
7490 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7491 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7492 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7493 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7494
7495 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7496 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7497 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7498 less time, and so on.
7499
7500 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7501 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7502
7503 @item
7504 A patch for the bug.
7505
7506 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7507 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7508 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7509 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7510
7511 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{@value{AS}} it is very hard to
7512 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path through
7513 the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be able to construct
7514 one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
7515
7516 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7517 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7518 help us to understand.
7519
7520 @item
7521 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7522
7523 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7524 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7525 @end itemize
7526
7527 @node Acknowledgements
7528 @chapter Acknowledgements
7529
7530 If you have contributed to GAS and your name isn't listed here,
7531 it is not meant as a slight. We just don't know about it. Send mail to the
7532 maintainer, and we'll correct the situation. Currently
7533 @c (January 1994),
7534 the maintainer is Ken Raeburn (email address @code{raeburn@@cygnus.com}).
7535
7536 Dean Elsner wrote the original @sc{gnu} assembler for the VAX.@footnote{Any
7537 more details?}
7538
7539 Jay Fenlason maintained GAS for a while, adding support for GDB-specific debug
7540 information and the 68k series machines, most of the preprocessing pass, and
7541 extensive changes in @file{messages.c}, @file{input-file.c}, @file{write.c}.
7542
7543 K. Richard Pixley maintained GAS for a while, adding various enhancements and
7544 many bug fixes, including merging support for several processors, breaking GAS
7545 up to handle multiple object file format back ends (including heavy rewrite,
7546 testing, an integration of the coff and b.out back ends), adding configuration
7547 including heavy testing and verification of cross assemblers and file splits
7548 and renaming, converted GAS to strictly ANSI C including full prototypes, added
7549 support for m680[34]0 and cpu32, did considerable work on i960 including a COFF
7550 port (including considerable amounts of reverse engineering), a SPARC opcode
7551 file rewrite, DECstation, rs6000, and hp300hpux host ports, updated ``know''
7552 assertions and made them work, much other reorganization, cleanup, and lint.
7553
7554 Ken Raeburn wrote the high-level BFD interface code to replace most of the code
7555 in format-specific I/O modules.
7556
7557 The original VMS support was contributed by David L. Kashtan. Eric Youngdale
7558 has done much work with it since.
7559
7560 The Intel 80386 machine description was written by Eliot Dresselhaus.
7561
7562 Minh Tran-Le at IntelliCorp contributed some AIX 386 support.
7563
7564 The Motorola 88k machine description was contributed by Devon Bowen of Buffalo
7565 University and Torbjorn Granlund of the Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
7566
7567 Keith Knowles at the Open Software Foundation wrote the original MIPS back end
7568 (@file{tc-mips.c}, @file{tc-mips.h}), and contributed Rose format support
7569 (which hasn't been merged in yet). Ralph Campbell worked with the MIPS code to
7570 support a.out format.
7571
7572 Support for the Zilog Z8k and Renesas H8/300 processors (tc-z8k,
7573 tc-h8300), and IEEE 695 object file format (obj-ieee), was written by
7574 Steve Chamberlain of Cygnus Support. Steve also modified the COFF back end to
7575 use BFD for some low-level operations, for use with the H8/300 and AMD 29k
7576 targets.
7577
7578 John Gilmore built the AMD 29000 support, added @code{.include} support, and
7579 simplified the configuration of which versions accept which directives. He
7580 updated the 68k machine description so that Motorola's opcodes always produced
7581 fixed-size instructions (e.g., @code{jsr}), while synthetic instructions
7582 remained shrinkable (@code{jbsr}). John fixed many bugs, including true tested
7583 cross-compilation support, and one bug in relaxation that took a week and
7584 required the proverbial one-bit fix.
7585
7586 Ian Lance Taylor of Cygnus Support merged the Motorola and MIT syntax for the
7587 68k, completed support for some COFF targets (68k, i386 SVR3, and SCO Unix),
7588 added support for MIPS ECOFF and ELF targets, wrote the initial RS/6000 and
7589 PowerPC assembler, and made a few other minor patches.
7590
7591 Steve Chamberlain made GAS able to generate listings.
7592
7593 Hewlett-Packard contributed support for the HP9000/300.
7594
7595 Jeff Law wrote GAS and BFD support for the native HPPA object format (SOM)
7596 along with a fairly extensive HPPA testsuite (for both SOM and ELF object
7597 formats). This work was supported by both the Center for Software Science at
7598 the University of Utah and Cygnus Support.
7599
7600 Support for ELF format files has been worked on by Mark Eichin of Cygnus
7601 Support (original, incomplete implementation for SPARC), Pete Hoogenboom and
7602 Jeff Law at the University of Utah (HPPA mainly), Michael Meissner of the Open
7603 Software Foundation (i386 mainly), and Ken Raeburn of Cygnus Support (sparc,
7604 and some initial 64-bit support).
7605
7606 Linas Vepstas added GAS support for the ESA/390 ``IBM 370'' architecture.
7607
7608 Richard Henderson rewrote the Alpha assembler. Klaus Kaempf wrote GAS and BFD
7609 support for openVMS/Alpha.
7610
7611 Timothy Wall, Michael Hayes, and Greg Smart contributed to the various tic*
7612 flavors.
7613
7614 David Heine, Sterling Augustine, Bob Wilson and John Ruttenberg from Tensilica,
7615 Inc.@: added support for Xtensa processors.
7616
7617 Several engineers at Cygnus Support have also provided many small bug fixes and
7618 configuration enhancements.
7619
7620 Jon Beniston added support for the Lattice Mico32 architecture.
7621
7622 Many others have contributed large or small bugfixes and enhancements. If
7623 you have contributed significant work and are not mentioned on this list, and
7624 want to be, let us know. Some of the history has been lost; we are not
7625 intentionally leaving anyone out.
7626
7627 @node GNU Free Documentation License
7628 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
7629 @include fdl.texi
7630
7631 @node AS Index
7632 @unnumbered AS Index
7633
7634 @printindex cp
7635
7636 @bye
7637 @c Local Variables:
7638 @c fill-column: 79
7639 @c End:
This page took 0.220294 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.